Canon Color imageRUNNER C4580 Service Manual Download Page 715 | Manualshive

Page: 715 / 851

background image

Chapter 19

19-70

12. SYSTEM

T-19-56

COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM

Sub item

Description

level.

DOWNLOAD

Switches to download mode.
Operation method
1) Select this item.
2) Press OK to enter download mode and have the copier wait for commands (wait for
connection). ("STNDBY" is now displayed, next to the DOWNLOAD sub-items.)
3) Use the service support tool to start downloading. ("CONNECTED"is displayed during
communication with the PC.)
4) When communication ends, "HOLD"is displayed. (The power can be turned off when
"HOLD"is displayed.)

1

CHK-TYPE

Used to specify partition number when performing HD-CHECK or HD-CLEAR.
Operation method
1) Select this item.
2) Use the numeric keypad to select the desired partition number.
0: Check and restore all bad sectors on hard disk
1: Image storage area
2: General-purpose file storage area
3: PDL file storage area
4: Firmware storage area
- General-purpose files include user-set data, log data, PDL spool data, and management
information for image data.
3) Press the OK key.

1

HD-CHECK

Use it to check the entire HD and perform recovery.
Operation method
set '0' to the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE
1) Select this item.
2) Press the OK key.

1

HD-CLEAR

Initializes partition specified by CHK-TYPE item.

- The following must be kept in mind and the user must be properly informed of the fact when
using CHECK-TYPE:
0: entire HDD -> no operation occurs (to initialize, use the SST)
1: image storage area -> removes image data
2: general-purpose file area (user settings data, various log data, PDL spool data, image data
control information) -> initializes files
3: PDL-related file storage area -> removes font data, requiring re-installation
4: firmware, address book, filter storage area -> no operation occurs (to initialize, use the SST)
Operation method
1) Select this item.
2) Press the OK key.

If you perform <HD-CLEAR> after selecting 1 (image storage area) or 3 (PDL file storage
area) for the <CHK-TYPE> item, the initialization process is performed after the power is
turned OFF/ON.
The initialization process takes about 5 minutes. A progress bar slowly advances to indicate
the progress during this time. Never turn the power OFF during this time.

1

«
...
713
714
715
716
717
...
»

Summary of Contents for Color imageRUNNER C4580

Page 1: ... MANUAL Color imageRUNNER C5180 C4580 C4080 Series COPYRIGHT 2006 CANON INC CANON imageRUNNER C5180 4580 4080 REV 0 PRINTED IN U S A AUGUST 2006 REV 0 DU7 1174 000 main unit cover qxp 8 3 2006 12 13 PM Page 1 ...

Page 2: ... need arises In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period Canon will issue a new edition of this manual The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law Trademarks The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies Copyright This ma...

Page 3: ...quiring care to avoid combustion fire Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question Provides a descri...

Page 4: ...used to indicate Low The voltage value however differs from circuit to circuit In addition the asterisk as in DRMD indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when 0 In practically all cases the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field Therefore the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed they are explained in terms of from sensors to the i...

Page 5: ...l Panel 1 13 1 2 3 User Mode Items 1 13 1 2 3 1 Common Settings 1 13 1 2 3 2 Timer Settings 1 16 1 2 3 3 Adjustments and Cleaning 1 16 1 2 3 4 Report Settings 1 17 1 2 3 5 System Settings 1 18 1 2 3 6 Copy Settings 1 21 1 2 3 7 Communications Settings 1 21 1 2 3 8 Mail Box Settings 1 23 1 2 3 9 Address Book Settings 1 23 1 2 4 User Maintenance 1 24 1 2 4 1 Cleaning 1 24 1 2 4 2 Inspection 1 26 1 2...

Page 6: ... Work 2 21 2 2 9 Dealing with power code mount 2 22 2 2 10 Connecting the Power Cord 2 24 2 2 11 Adjustment of Fixing Assembly 2 24 2 2 12 Checking the Image Margin 2 24 2 2 13 Adjustment of Left Margin of Image 2 24 2 2 14 Adjustment of the Margin along Leading Edge of Image 2 27 2 2 15 Adjustment of the Image Area non image width 2 27 2 2 16 Setting the Auto Gradation Adjustment 2 27 2 3 Checkin...

Page 7: ...ntents Voice Guidance Kit A2 2 37 2 9 2 Turning off the Host Machine 2 38 2 9 3 Installation Procedures 2 38 Chapter 3 Basic Operation 3 1 Construction 3 1 3 1 1 Functional Construction 3 1 3 2 Basic Sequence 3 2 3 2 1 Basic Sequence When the Power Is ON 3 2 3 2 2 Basic Sequence of Operations 3 4 Chapter 4 Basic Operations As a Printer 4 1 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry 4 1 4 1 1 Configu...

Page 8: ...ption Functions 5 21 5 6 6 Flow of Image Data for PDL Functions 5 22 5 7 Parts Replacement Procedure 5 23 5 7 1 Main Controller Box 5 23 5 7 2 Main Controller PCB main 5 23 5 7 3 Main Controller PCB sub R A 5 27 5 7 4 Main Controller PCB sub PDRM A 5 28 5 7 5 Main Controller PCB sub SJ A 5 28 5 7 6 Main Controller PCB sub LAN A 5 29 5 7 7 Main Controller PCB sub RB A 5 30 5 7 8 SRAM PCB 5 31 5 7 9...

Page 9: ... Operation 6 15 6 3 5 Dirt Sensor Control 6 17 6 3 5 1 Stream Reading Dust Detection Control 6 17 6 3 5 2 White Plate Dust Detection Control 6 19 6 3 6 Image Processing 6 21 6 3 6 1 Overview 6 21 6 3 6 2 CCD Drive 6 22 6 3 6 3 CCD Gain Correction Offset Correction 6 22 6 3 6 4 CCD Output A D Conversion 6 22 6 3 6 5 Outline of Shading Correction 6 22 6 3 6 6 Shading Adjustment 6 23 6 3 6 7 Shading ...

Page 10: ... 8 12 8 3 3 2 Laser Scanner Motor Speed Change Control 8 13 8 3 4 Controlling the Laser Shutter 8 14 8 3 4 1 Laser shutter control 8 14 8 3 5 Correcting Image Displacement 8 15 8 3 5 1 Outline 8 15 8 3 5 2 Timing of Color Displacement Detection Correction 8 16 8 3 5 3 Detecting Correcting Color Displacement in Sub Scanning Direction 8 17 8 3 5 4 Detecting Correcting the Angle in Main Scanning Dire...

Page 11: ...e gradation 9 24 9 5 7 SALT Dmax Control development characteristics correction 9 25 9 5 8 SALT Dhalf Control development characteristics correction 9 26 9 5 9 Auto Gradation Control 9 27 9 6 Drum Unit 9 29 9 6 1 Outline of the Drum Unit 9 29 9 6 1 1 Outline of the Drum Unit 9 29 9 6 1 2 Drum Receptacle Presence Absence Detection 9 29 9 6 1 3 Drum Unit D UNIT Drive Control 9 30 9 6 2 Developing As...

Page 12: ... 60 9 9 7 Transfer Cleaning Unit 9 62 9 9 8 Intermediate Transfer Belt 9 62 9 9 9 Intermediate Transfer Belt Tension Roller 9 66 9 9 10 Primary Transfer Roller 9 66 9 9 11 Secondary Transfer External Roller 9 67 9 9 12 Secondary Transfer Internal Roller 9 69 9 9 13 Toner Container Drive Unit 9 70 9 9 14 Waste Toner Detection PCB 9 71 9 9 15 Feedscrew Rotation Sensor 9 73 9 9 16 Tone Container Moto...

Page 13: ...utline 10 18 10 6 2 Basic Sequence of Operations 10 19 10 6 3 Identifying the Size of Paper 10 19 10 6 4 Detecting the Presence Absence of Paper 10 20 10 6 5 Detecting the Last paper 10 21 10 7 Registration Unit 10 22 10 7 1 Outline 10 22 10 8 Duplex Feeding Unit 10 24 10 8 1 Outline 10 24 10 8 2 Controling Horizontal Registration 10 25 10 8 3 Face Down Delivery A4 5 Sheets in Circulation 10 26 10...

Page 14: ...ion Motor 10 60 10 10 25 Horizontal Registration Motor 10 60 10 10 26 Registration Sensor 10 62 10 10 27 Fixing Feeder Unit 10 62 10 10 28 Pickup Vertical Path Roller 10 63 10 10 29 Inside Delivery Roller 10 65 10 10 30 Fixing Feeder Unit Open Closed Sensor 10 66 10 10 31 Fixing Arching Sensor 10 69 10 10 32 Pickup Vertical Path Cover Open Closed Sensor 10 70 10 10 33 Fixing Feeder Unit Open Close...

Page 15: ...trol Mechanisms 11 5 11 2 1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Roller 11 6 11 2 1 1 Overview 11 6 11 2 1 2 Controlling the Speed According to Paper Type 11 6 11 2 1 3 Fixing Arch Control 11 7 11 2 2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature 11 8 11 2 2 1 Overview 11 8 11 2 2 2 At Power On Fixing belt less than 100Åé 11 8 11 2 2 3 At Power On Fixing belt 100deg C or more 11 10 11 2 2 4 Standby mod...

Page 16: ...ing Belt Position Sensor Unit 11 48 11 5 13 Fixing Releasing HP Sensor 11 50 11 5 14 Fixing Wrap Sensor 11 50 11 5 15 Fixing Motor Unit 11 51 11 5 16 Fixing Pressure Motor Unit 11 51 11 5 17 Fixing Belt Displacement Control Motor Unit 11 51 11 5 18 Pressure Belt Displacement Control Motor Unit 11 53 Chapter 12 Externals and Controls 12 1 Control Panel 12 1 12 1 1 Outline 12 1 12 1 2 LCD Processing...

Page 17: ...12 27 12 5 4 Secondary Transfer High Voltage Unit 12 28 12 5 5 IH Power Supply Assembly 12 29 12 5 6 DC Power Supply Unit 12 29 12 5 7 Control Panel 12 30 12 5 8 Control Panel LCD Unit 12 30 12 5 9 DC Controller Box 12 31 12 5 10 DC Controller PCB 12 32 12 5 11 Main Power Supply PCB 12 33 12 5 12 All Night Power Supply PCB 12 34 12 5 13 IH Power Supply PCB 12 34 12 5 14 Leakage Breaker 12 35 12 5 ...

Page 18: ...verview 13 1 13 1 2 MEAP Counter 13 1 13 1 3 Construction of the MEAP Platform 13 2 Chapter 14 RDS 14 1 RDS 14 1 14 1 1 Application operation mode 14 1 14 1 2 Service Center URL and Port Specification 14 1 14 1 3 Communication test 14 1 14 1 4 Communication log 14 1 14 1 5 Detailed Communication log 14 1 14 1 6 SOAP communication function 14 1 14 1 7 Resend at SOAP transmission error 14 2 14 1 8 e...

Page 19: ...2 2 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass 16 5 16 2 3 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB or Initializing the RAM 16 5 16 2 4 Treatment for ADF Replacement 16 7 16 3 Laser Exposure System 16 8 16 3 1 Laser Exposure System 16 8 16 4 Image Formation System 16 8 16 4 1 Laser maker identification 16 8 16 4 2 After Replacing the Transfer Unit 16 8 16 4 3 After Replacing the Pattern Reading Unit 16 ...

Page 20: ...r 18 Self Diagnosis 18 1 Error Code Table 18 1 18 1 1 Error code tables 18 1 18 2 Error Code Details 18 4 18 2 1 Table of error code details 18 4 Chapter 19 Service Mode 19 1 DISPLAY Status Display Mode 19 1 19 1 1 COPIER 19 1 19 1 2 FEEDER 19 16 19 2 I O I O Display Mode 19 17 19 2 1 Overview 19 17 19 2 2 DC CON 19 18 19 2 3 R CON 19 24 19 2 4 FEEDER 19 26 19 2 5 SORTER 19 27 19 2 6 MN CONT 19 37...

Page 21: ...0 14 20 3 2 Formatting Selected Partitions 20 15 20 3 3 Formatting the Partitions 20 16 20 4 Downloading System Software 20 18 20 4 1 Batch Downloading 20 18 20 4 2 Downloading the System Software Single 20 23 20 5 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data 20 28 20 5 1 Outline 20 28 20 5 2 Uploading Procedure 20 29 20 5 3 Download Procedures 20 32 20 6 Version Upgrade using USB 20 34 20 6 1 Menu Funct...

Page 22: ...Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION ...

Page 23: ...13 1 2 3 2 Timer Settings 1 16 1 2 3 3 Adjustments and Cleaning 1 16 1 2 3 4 Report Settings 1 17 1 2 3 5 System Settings 1 18 1 2 3 6 Copy Settings 1 21 1 2 3 7 Communications Settings 1 21 1 2 3 8 Mail Box Settings 1 23 1 2 3 9 Address Book Settings 1 23 1 2 4 User Maintenance 1 24 1 2 4 1 Cleaning 1 24 1 2 4 2 Inspection 1 26 1 2 5 Safety 1 27 1 2 5 1 CDRH Regulations 1 27 1 2 5 2 Laser safety ...

Page 24: ...X1 8 Platen Cover Reader Unit standard 2 Saddle Finisher W2 9 Document Tray J1 standard 3 Finisher W1 10 Paper Deck Y1 4 Puncher Unit AH1 11 Card Reader D1 5 Copy Tray N1 12 Plain Pedestal E1 6 Copy Tray M1 13 Cassette Feeding Unit Z1 7 DADF M1 Reader Unit standard 14 Key Switch Unit A2 1 5 7 8 9 2 3 4 13 12 11 10 14 6 ...

Page 25: ...y Expansion Board E1 6 imagePASS H1 7 ColorPASS GX100 8 Color UFR II PCL Printer Kit N1 licence 9 Color PS Printer Kit N1 licence 10 Barcode Printing Kit A1 11 Universal Send PDF Advanced Feature Set A1 licence 12 Universal Send PDF Security Feature Set A1 licence 13 Digital User Signature PDF Kit A1 licence 14 Web Access Software E1 licence 15 Secure Watermark A1 licence 5 3 4 2 6 7 1 9 10 8 11 1...

Page 26: ...nctions associated with ScanGear Color PCL PS Printer Kit Adds PCL printing functions and PS printing functions Requires a Color UFR II Printer Kit 16 Encrypted Secure Print Software C1 licence 17 Remote Operator s Software Kit A2 licence Need 4 at the same time Transmitting Canon Color Universal Send Kit iR512MB Expansion RAM Searchable PDF Universal Send Searchable PDF Kit Faxing Super G3 Fax Bo...

Page 27: ...added Super G3 Fax Board Adds G3 fax functions In G3 FAX the document created by an application can be faxed directly from PC via network Cannot use simultaneously with multi line Fax board Super G3 Multi Line Fax Board In addition to the functions of super G3 Multi Line FAX Board adds two line faxing function Cannot use simultaneously with Super G3 Fax board Canon Color Universal Send Kit Adds th...

Page 28: ...cover 11 Lower left cover 3 Reader front cover 12 Rear left cover lower 4 Card reader cover 13 Left rear cover lower 5 Center Delivery tray 14 Delivery vertical path cover 6 Control panel 15 Rear left cover upper 7 Front cover 16 Upper left cover 8 Cassette 1 17 Upper cover 9 Cassette 2 18 Inner upper cover 1 2 3 4 10 11 5 6 7 8 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 ...

Page 29: ... rear cover 12 Pick up vertical path cover 4 Reader joint cover 13 Front right cover 5 Left rear cover upper 14 Manual feed pick up tray 6 Upper rear cover 15 Manual feed pick up unit cover 7 Rear fan cover 16 Middle right cover 8 Shield cover 17 Upper right cover 9 Lower rear cover 1 2 3 4 10 11 5 6 7 8 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 ...

Page 30: ...r 2 4 Scanning lamp 29 Intermediate transfer belt tension roller 5 CCD unit 30 Cassette 2 6 Toner cartridge 31 Intermediate transfer belt cleaner unit 7 Laser unit 32 Pressure belt tension roller 8 Primary transfer roller 33 Pressure belt 8 7 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 36 35 38 37 39 41 40 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 ...

Page 31: ...tical path roller 40 Fixing belt 16 Feed roller 41 Delivery vertical path member 17 Pickup roller 42 Delivery vertical path roller 2 18 Separation roller 43 Photosensitive drum 19 Pickup unit 1 44 Developing cylinder 20 Pickup unit 2 45 Primary drum unit 21 Cassette 1 46 Charging roller 22 Duplex feed roller 4 47 Delivery vertical path roller 1 23 Upper registration roller 48 Delivery vertical pat...

Page 32: ...r switches main power switch and control panel power switch The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on i e other than in power save mode low power mode sleep mode F 1 6 1 Control panel power switch 2 Main power indicator lamp 3 Main power switch ON OFF ON OFF 1 2 3 C 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ID 123 3 1 2 ...

Page 33: ...hapter 1 1 10 Do not turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated during which access is made to the HDD If deprived of power the HDD can suffer a fault E602 F 1 7 Starting up Please wait ...

Page 34: ...to press the power switch of the control panel for 3 sec or more and execute shutdown sequence When Sending Data to the Printer or Using the Fax Unit Be sure that the Execution Memory lamp on the control panel is off before operating the main power switch Turning off the main power while a job is under way can cause loss of the data being processed ...

Page 35: ...1 12 When Downloading Is Under Way Do not turn off the control panel switch or the main power switch Turning off the main power switch while downloading is under way can disable the machine F 1 9 O N O F F ON OFF ...

Page 36: ...r lamp 4 Control panel power switch 13 Error indicator lamp 5 Place to put touch pen 14 ID key 6 Plate to put clip 15 Clear key 7 Touch panel 16 Main power indicator lamp 8 Reset key 17 Start key 9 Help key simplified navi 18 Stop key Mode Description Initial functions Copy Send Fax Mail box MEAP Use it to switch the System Status screen to the Initial screen On Off Setup the initial screen of the...

Page 37: ...ttached Tray A copier box printer receive fax other Tray B copier box printer receive fax other Tray C copier box printer receive fax other If the optional finisher M1 is attached Tray A copier box printer receive fax other Tray B copier box printer receive fax other If the optional finisher T1 or saddle finisher T2 is attached Tray A copier box printer receive fax other Tray B copier box printer ...

Page 38: ... are attached non sort sort shift sort group shift group staple corner upper left lower left upper right lower right double left right punch hole Double sided print On Off File delete after print On Off Print merge On Off Switch language of display On Off Reverse screen color On Off Between jobs shift On Off Separator between Jobs On Off Separator between Copies On Off Display print waiting time C...

Page 39: ... 3 hr 4 hr Mode Description Zoom fine adjust X 1 0 to 1 0 0 1 intervals 0 Y 1 0 to 1 0 0 1 intervals 0 Center binding staple edging Press start Center binding position change Position 2 0mm to 2 0mm 0 25mm intervals 0mm Auto gradation correction Quick correction press start Full correction automatic correction after the machine prints and scans 3 sets of test prints Density correction Copy box 1 t...

Page 40: ... report time On Off Timer setting 00 00 to 23 59 Send receive separate On Off Settings fax Fax TX report For error only On Off Report with TX image On Off Fax activity report Every 40 communications auto print On Off Daily activity report time On Off Timer setting 00 00 to 23 59 Send receive separate On Off Fax RX report For error only On Off Fax box RX report On Off Print list send Address book l...

Page 41: ...anagement On Off Register Dept ID Password Register Edit Erase Limit Functions Count management Clear Count print Clear All Totals Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs On Off Allow Remote Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs On Off Allow Black Copy Inbox Print Jobs On Off Allow Black Printer Jobs On Off Communications Setting E mail I Fax Settings Maximum Data Size for Sending 0 Off 1 to 99 MB 3 MB Full Mode...

Page 42: ...characters maximum Forwarding Settings Receive Type Validate Invalidate Register Registered Forwarding Settings Forward w o Conditions E mail Priority Edit Erase Print List Clear Message Board Clear Auto Online Offline Auto Online On Off Auto Offline On Off Date Time Settings Date and Time Setting 12 digit number Time Zone GMT 12 00 to GMT 12 00 GMT 9 00 Daylight Saving Time On Off Limit Functions...

Page 43: ...On Off Address Book On Off Restrictions for Receiving Device Info On Off Restore Data Initial setting register setting value Dept ID Address Book Receive Limit for Each Function Initial setting register setting value On Off Dept ID On Off Address Book On Off Communication Log Details Print List Report Settings Initialize All Data Settings Initialize Use Asterisks to Enter Access No Passwords On Of...

Page 44: ...l Four paper sources maximum Standard Key 1 2 Settings for Regular Screen Various modes No Settings Standard Key Settings for Express Copy Screen Displayed Standard Keys Up to 5 Set Keys Up to 10 Set Keys Settings Various modes No Settings Auto Collate On Off Image Orientation Priority On Off Auto Orientation On Off Standard Settings Store Initialize Initialize Copy Settings Initialize Mode Descri...

Page 45: ...tch B On Off Switch C On Off Switch D On Off Image reduction On Off Received Page Footer On Off 2 on 1 Log On Off Gamma Value for YCbCr Received Jobs Gamma 1 0 Gamma 1 4 Gamma 1 8 1 Gamma 2 2 Fax Settings User Settings Unit Telephone 20 digits maximum Tel Line Type Pulse Tone Volume Control Alarm Volume 0 to 8 levels 4 Monitor Volume 0 to 8 levels 4 Off hook alarm On Off Fax Settings TX Settings E...

Page 46: ...rioritized TX TX prohibition Mode Description User Inboxes Settings Inbox No 00 to 99 Register Inbox Name 24 characters maximum Password Seven digits maximum Time until Doc Auto Erase 0 Off 1 2 3 6 12 hours 1 2 3 1 7 30 days URL Send Settings Print data saved in the mail box from the printer driver On Off Initialize Standard Scan Settings Store Initialize Confidential Fax Inboxes Settings Inbox No...

Page 47: ...w to clean such components 1 Feeder back Copyboard Cover Wipe the copyboard cover 1 using a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent well wrung then dry wipe it with a soft cloth F 1 11 2 Rubber roller Platen Roller Wipe the platen roller 1 using a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent well wrung thereafter dry wipe it with a soft cloth F 1 12 1 1 ...

Page 48: ...hem with a soft cloth F 1 13 4 DF Glass Retainer Edge Guide Wipe the DF glass retainer 1 and the edge guide 2 using a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent well wrung thereafter dry wipe them with a soft cloth F 1 14 5 Vertical Size Plate Clean the vertical size plate 1 using a cloth moistened with water or solution of middle detergent well wrung thereafter dry wipe it with a so...

Page 49: ...he breaker operates properly Advise the user to check the breaker on a periodical basis about once a month and keep a record of inspection Go through the following 1 Turn off the main power switch 2 Push the test button 1 of the breaker with the tip of a ball point pen or the like F 1 16 3 See that the breaker switch 1 shifts to the OFF side thus cutting off the power F 1 17 1 1 ON OFF ...

Page 50: ...egulations The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drum Administration put into force regulations concerning laser products on August 2 1976 These regulations apply to laser products manufactured on and after August 1 1976 and the sale of laser products not certified under the regulations is banned within the Untied States The label shown here indicates compliance with th...

Page 51: ...ine Struktur die keine Laserstrahlen nach außen dringen lässt Unter der Voraussetzung dass der Benutzer dieses Gerät normal bedient ist ein Austritt von Laserstrahlen daher ausgeschlossen 1 2 5 3 Handling the Laser Assembly When servicing the area around the laser assembly be sure to turn off the main power If you must servicr while the power is turned on be sure to keep the followings Do not use ...

Page 52: ... toner into fire It may cause explosion 2 Toner on Clothing or Skin If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner wipe it off with tissue then wash it off with water Do not use warm water which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the fibers of the cloth Do not bring toner into contact with plastic material It tends to react easily ...

Page 53: ...m falschen Typ ausgewechselt besteht Explosionsgefahr Gebrauchte Batterien gemäß der Anleitung beseitigen 1 2 5 6 Notes at Replacing Disposing the Fixing Unit Points to Notes at Replacing Disposing the Fixing Unit Be sure not to throw the fixing unit into the fire in case of explosion 1 2 5 7 Notes before it works serving Notes before it works serving At servicing be sure to turn OFF the power sou...

Page 54: ...mary transfer Transfer roller system Transfer method secondary transfer Transfer roller system Separation method Curvature separation static eliminator Drum cleaning method None Trasnsfer cleaning method Blade with equalization spring pressure Fixing method Twin belt fixing Delivery method Face down face up Warm up time At power on at 20 deg C room temperature iR C5180 Series 4 min or less iR C458...

Page 55: ... Mono Color Plain paper 64 to 105g m2 SR A3 320x450mm 19 5 19 5 12x18inch 305x457mm 24 24 19 5 19 5 A3 LDR 25 5 25 5 19 5 19 5 B4 LGL 25 5 25 5 22 3 22 3 A4 LTR B5 51 51 31 31 A4R LTRR B5R 25 5 25 5 25 5 25 5 A5R STMTR 25 5 25 5 25 5 25 5 Heavy paper up to 105g m2 SR A3 320x450mm 9 75 9 75 12x18inch 305x457mm 12 12 9 75 9 75 A3 LDR 12 75 12 75 9 75 9 75 B4 LGL 15 15 11 11 A4 LTR B5 25 5 25 5 15 5 ...

Page 56: ...5 1 B4 LGL 20 1 20 1 19 3 19 3 17 17 16 1 16 1 A4 LTR B5 41 2 41 2 33 7 33 7 31 5 31 5 25 8 25 8 A4R LTRR B5R 20 1 20 1 20 4 20 4 20 1 20 1 20 20 A5R STMTR 20 1 20 1 20 4 20 4 20 1 20 1 20 20 Heavy paper up to 105g m2 SR A3 320x450mm 12x18inch 305x457mm 9 4 9 4 8 7 8 7 8 4 8 4 7 3 7 3 A3 LDR 10 0 10 0 9 0 9 0 8 4 8 4 7 1 7 1 B4 LGL 10 0 10 0 8 9 8 9 8 4 8 4 7 4 7 4 A4 LTR B5 20 8 20 8 16 7 16 7 15...

Page 57: ...6 5 14 5 A3 LDR 22 5 20 16 5 14 5 B4 LGL 22 5 20 19 16 8 A4 LTR B5 45 40 26 5 23 5 A4R LTRR B5R 22 5 20 21 5 19 3 A5R STMTR 22 5 20 21 5 19 3 Heavy paper up to 105g m2 SR A3 320x450mm 7 7 12x18inch 305x457mm 9 3 9 3 7 7 A3 LDR 10 10 7 7 B4 LGL 11 8 11 8 8 4 8 4 A4 LTR B5 20 20 11 8 11 8 A4R LTRR B5R 13 7 13 7 10 10 A5R STMTR 20 20 11 8 11 8 Tab paper 11 11 Transparency A3 A4 A4R LTR LTRR 11 9 5 11...

Page 58: ...3 1 13 5 11 7 B4 LGL 17 7 15 8 16 8 14 9 15 13 1 14 3 12 4 A4 LTR B5 36 6 32 6 29 2 25 9 27 8 24 7 23 3 20 6 A4R LTRR B5R 20 4 18 2 20 4 18 2 18 1 17 18 1 17 A5R STMTR 20 4 18 2 20 4 18 2 18 1 17 18 1 17 Heavy paper up to 105g m2 SR A3 320x450mm 12x18inch 305x457mm 7 5 7 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 6 7 5 9 5 9 A3 LDR 7 6 7 6 6 5 6 5 6 7 6 7 5 8 5 8 B4 LGL 7 6 7 6 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 6 A4 LTR B5 16 3 16 3 12 7 12 ...

Page 59: ... 5 14 5 A3 LDR 22 5 20 16 5 14 5 B4 LGL 22 5 20 19 16 8 A4 LTR B5 40 36 26 5 23 5 A4R LTRR B5R 22 5 20 21 5 19 3 A5R STMTR 22 5 20 21 5 19 3 Heavy paper up to 105g m2 SR A3 320x450mm 7 7 12x18inch 305x457mm 9 3 9 3 7 7 A3 LDR 10 10 7 7 B4 LGL 11 8 11 8 8 4 8 4 A4 LTR B5 20 20 11 8 11 8 A4R LTRR B5R 13 7 13 7 10 10 A5R STMTR 20 20 11 8 11 8 Tab paper 11 11 Transparency A3 A4 A4R LTR LTRR 11 9 5 11 ...

Page 60: ...3 1 13 5 11 7 B4 LGL 17 7 15 8 16 8 14 9 15 13 1 14 3 12 4 A4 LTR B5 36 6 32 6 29 2 25 9 27 8 24 7 23 3 20 6 A4R LTRR B5R 20 4 18 2 20 4 18 2 18 1 17 18 1 17 A5R STMTR 20 4 18 2 20 4 18 2 18 1 17 18 1 17 Heavy paper up to 105g m2 SR A3 320x450mm 12x18inch 305x457mm 7 5 7 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 6 7 5 9 5 9 A3 LDR 7 6 7 6 6 5 6 5 6 7 6 7 5 8 5 8 B4 LGL 7 6 7 6 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 6 A4 LTR B5 16 3 16 3 12 7 12 ...

Page 61: ...es yes no 279x432 mm 11x17 yes yes yes no 305x457 mm 12x18 yes yes yes no 320x457 mm no yes no no Cassette Manual Feed Tray Cassette Pedestal Side Paper Deck Plain paper 64 to 105 g m2 yes yes yes yes Heavy paper up to 209 g m2 yes yes yes yes Recycled paper yes yes yes yes Gloss paper 1 no yes no no Bond paper yes yes yes yes Transparency 1 yes yes yes no Postcard no yes no no 2 pane postcard 1 n...

Page 62: ... or less In standby 50 dB or less Power supply 100 V 120 V 230 V Power consumption maximum 1500 W or less if equipped with cassette pedestal Reference value In standby 100V 344W 120V 273W 230V 350W When equipped with all accessories Ozone Maximum 0 05 ppm or less Average 0 02 ppm or less Dimensions Width W 620 mm Depth D 850 mm Height H 1198 mm including printer unit reader unit ADF and cassette p...

Page 63: ...11 Reduce IV 1 0 707 Reduce V 1 0 816 Reduce VI 1 0 865 Enlarge I 1 1 154 Enlarge II 1 1 224 Enlarge III 1 1 414 Enlarge IV 1 2 000 Enlarge V 1 4 000 Zoom 1 0 250 to 4 000 25 to 400 in 1 increments Reading resolution Main scanning direction 600 dpi Sub scanning direction 600 dpi Number of gradations Reading maximum 256 Main scanning direction 0 to 2 mm against 297 mm Sub scanning direction 0 to 2 ...

Page 64: ...Chapter 2 INSTALLATION ...

Page 65: ...tment of Fixing Assembly 2 24 2 2 12 Checking the Image Margin 2 24 2 2 13 Adjustment of Left Margin of Image 2 24 2 2 14 Adjustment of the Margin along Leading Edge of Image 2 27 2 2 15 Adjustment of the Image Area non image width 2 27 2 2 16 Setting the Auto Gradation Adjustment 2 27 2 3 Checking the Connection to the Network 2 28 2 3 1 Summary 2 28 2 3 2 Checking the Network Connection 2 28 2 3...

Page 66: ...ntents Document Tray J1 2 33 2 7 2 Installation Procedures 2 34 2 8 Installing the Key Switch Unit 2 34 2 8 1 Checking Contents Key Switch Unit A2 2 34 2 8 2 Installation Procedures 2 35 2 8 3 Checking After the Installation 2 36 2 9 Installing the Voice Guidance Kit 2 37 2 9 1 Checking Contents Voice Guidance Kit A2 2 37 2 9 2 Turning off the Host Machine 2 38 2 9 3 Installation Procedures 2 38 ...

Page 67: ...n low temperature to in mild temperature implement this mode before automatic graduation adjustment Toner cartridge and drum unit should be removed before implementing this mode Dummy transfer cleaning unit should be installed Working time of this mode is six to eighteen minutes varying due to its circumstances OK is displayed if normally completed Enter the Srvice mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL DRY...

Page 68: ...s likely to be subject to the direct rays of the sun provide curtains or shades 5 The site must be well ventilated It is important however that the machine will not be placed near air vents of the room The amount of ozone generated by the machine should not affect the health of the individuals nearby Nevertheless some individuals may find the odor rather unpleasant Be sure the room will be ventila...

Page 69: ... 3 2 1 2 Spatial Requirements The dimensions indicated in the figure are minimum requirements Try to make available as much space as possible a Machine F 2 2 1279mm 1660mm 500mm 500mm 500mm 100mm 590mm 450mm 620mm ...

Page 70: ...r 2 2 4 b Machine Paper Deck Finisher Saddle Finisher Fax Puncher F 2 3 c Machine Deck Finisher Fax F 2 4 13 2585mm 500mm 50 500mm 10 620mm 1395mm 570mm 1327mm 2120mm 500mm 500mm 500mm 100mm 930mm 570mm 620mm ...

Page 71: ... the pedestal 2 2 cassette pedestal or plain pedestal Note Including the work to mount the main body on the pedestal 3 Reader unit 4 Main body 5 Reader Heater 6 Cassette heater kit to the machine proper 7 Card reader 8 Cassette heater 9 Side paper deck 10 Key switch unit 11 Document Tray 12 Copy Tray 13 Finisher saddle finisher 1327mm 1710mm 500mm 500mm 500mm 100mm 520mm 570mm 620mm ...

Page 72: ...Round 8 pc 2 Transfer cleaning unit 1 pc 7 Size plate 2 pc 3 Secondary transfer outside roller unit 1 pc 8 Cassette size label 1 pc 4 1 power cord face plate 1 pc 9 Shut down instructions label 1 pc 5 Touch pen 1 pc 1 Use it only when the plain pedestal the 2 cassette pedestal is not installed ...

Page 73: ...istration card Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Installation check list Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Main unit warranty card Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Drum warranty card Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes EULA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Network Quick Start Guide No Yes No Yes No Yes Release Note No Yes No Yes No Yes Universal Send Trial Kit B1 Yes No Yes No Yes No CD and others CiR C5180 CiRC5180i CiR C4580 CiR C4580i CiRC4080...

Page 74: ...ift the main body while keeping it level F 2 7 Install two cassette pedestal and plane pedestal as in the following order 1 Two cassette pedestal and plane pedestal including mounting the body on pedestal 2 Reader 3 Main body The Color Image Reader F1and the Color Image Reader E1 may be installed in the same way The illustrations that follow are of the Color Image Reader F1 1 Unpack and take the r...

Page 75: ...mpact Take care not to trap your hand between the reader unit and the host machine F 2 10 6 While lifting the reader unit slightly fit the reader unit fixing plate 1 and fix it in place using a stepped screw 2 F 2 11 7 Fix the wire 1 in place using the stepped screw Be sure that the orientation of the wire is correct F 2 12 8 Hook the washer 1 fitted in step 7 on the screw 2 F 2 13 1 2 3 1 2 2 1 1...

Page 76: ...e wire 2 F 2 14 Mount the joint cover 1 2 screws RS tightening M4X8 2 F 2 15 10 Remove the 3 mirror fixing screw 1 Be sure to store the 3 mirror fixing screws 1 away They will be needed when transporting the machine in the future F 2 16 11 Remove the reader unit left cover 1 2 screws 2 F 2 17 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 77: ... B of the upper left cover claw using nippers and remove the 2 areas A F 2 20 15 While forcing the 2 hooks 1 in the direction of the arrow fix it in place using 2 screws 2 each F 2 21 If the hook does not have a cushion area A The cushion 1 will not fit on the plate if the hook is moved excessively Check to be sure that the cushion is on the plate 3 2 1 2 1 B B A 1 1 2 2 ...

Page 78: ...in reverse upper left cover card reader cover reader left cover 17 Connect the reader communication cable 1 and fix it in place using a clamp 2 F 2 23 18 Mount the ADF power cable 1 to the host machine F 2 24 19 Fix the ADF power cable 1 in place using 3 clamps 2 F 2 25 A 1 1 A 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 ...

Page 79: ...ase lever 1 in the direction of the arrow F 2 27 3 Remove the waste toner container 1 F 2 28 4 Remove the dummy transfer cleaning unit 1 1 screw 2 F 2 29 Be sure to store away the removed dummy transfer cleaning unit MEMO Measures against condensation When transferring the body from the site in low temperature to in mild temperature implement this mode before automatic graduation adjustment Toner ...

Page 80: ...ansfer cleaning unit blade The area is coated with lubricant 6 Fit the included transfer cleaning unit 1 using the screw 2 removed in step 4 Match the boss 4 found at the top of the waste toner feedscrew case against the groove 3 in the transfer cleaning unit base F 2 30 Be sure that the front cover rib 2 is not in contact with the edge 1 of the transfer cleaning unit blade F 2 31 7 While holding ...

Page 81: ...g lever 1 of the toner container Y F 2 33 2 When mounting the toner container be sure to fully turn the fixing lever 2 in the direction of the arrow while forcing the white member 1 toward the rear of the machine F 2 34 3 Take out the toner container Y from the packaging box 4 Take out the toner container Y from the packaging bag 5 Hold the toner container Y 1 with both hands and shake it several ...

Page 82: ...Drum Unit in Place 1 Take out the drum unit Y from its packaging box 2 Do not remove the protective cover 1 since it will serve as a rail later Take out the drum unit Y 1 from its packaging bag and remove the drying agent 2 F 2 37 3 Pull out the front and rear pressure release hooks 1 in the direction of the arrow Be sure to remove the pressure release hooks 1 F 2 38 4 Push down the anti interfere...

Page 83: ... the arrow F 2 40 6 Turn the open close lever 1 of the drum unit cover to the left by 90 deg to open the drum unit cover 2 F 2 41 7 Match the bulge 2 found on the bottom of the protective cover against the dent 1 found in the back of the drum unit cover of the host machine F 2 42 1 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 84: ...unit cover then turn the open close lever to the right by 90 deg to fix it in place 12 Holding the waste toner box in place shift the intermediate transfer unit release lever back into its initial position F 2 45 13 Close the front cover 2 2 6 Fitting the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller Unit in Place 1 Take out the secondary transfer outside roller unit from the packaging box Do not touch the ro...

Page 85: ...er of the secondary transfer outside roller unit F 2 47 4 Push both ends 1 of the secondary transfer unit to fit it in place Be sure it is securely in place F 2 48 Making Checks After the Work Check to be sure that the gear A of the secondary transfer roller unit rotates properly F 2 49 5 Close the fixing feeding unit 1 2 1 A ...

Page 86: ...k the type of paper a user will use and adjust the slide guide 1 of each cassette to the paper size F 2 51 3 Adjust the side guide plate 1 and the end plate 2 to the scale of the paper size F 2 52 4 Attach the cassette size label 2 to the cassette size plate 1 F 2 53 5 Deposit paper in each cassette and set it to the main body 1 1 STMT R LTR LTR R LGL 11X17 2 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 87: ...e language while positioning it as shown on the ADF open close cover MEMO Do not use it to the Color Image Reader E1 F 2 55 Cleaning Position Label Included in the reader 1 Attach the Cleaning Position Label 1 whose text is in the appropriate language while positioning it as shown on the front cover F 2 56 Do Not Copy Label Included in the reader 1 Attach the Do Not Copy Label 1 whose text is in t...

Page 88: ...he reader power cable 2 from the 4 clamps 3 and disconnect the connector 4 F 2 58 2 Remove the rear cover 1 of the host machine 10 screw 2 Remove 2 screws 3 Loosen F 2 59 3 Remove the rear left cover 1 of the host machine 2 screws 2 F 2 60 4 Disconnect the 4 connectors 1 and remove the 3 clamps 2 and the 4 screws 3 Take care not to drop the screw F 2 61 3 3 1 2 4 2 2 2 1 3 2 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 3 ...

Page 89: ... power unit 1 F 2 62 7 Remove the 4 screws 1 and slide the DC power supply unit 2 slightly toward the front F 2 63 8 Remove the 3 screws 1 and pull out the power supply cord mount slightly to the front F 2 64 9 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and detach the power cord mount 2 F 2 65 10 Remove the screw 1 and open the 2 clamps 2 F 2 66 1 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 90: ... Margin 1 Place the test chart on the copyboard glass make a copy by picking up paper from the cassette 1 2 and check the image When the two cassette pedestal is installed pick up paper from the cassette 3 4 and check the image Check to be sure that there is no unusual sound Check the image quality every standard magnification Check to be sure that the operation for specified number of sheets is p...

Page 91: ...edestal is installed F 2 70 Adjustment of the Cassette 1 4 Insert the blade of the screwdriver into the hole of the front right stay and loosen the screw 1 to make an adjustment of the position of the adjusting plate 2 Perform the same step to the cassette 3 and 4 F 2 71 F 2 72 1 If the adjusting plate is moved to the right 2 the margin of the front edge of the paper narrows 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 L2 2 1 ...

Page 92: ...hole of the front right stay and loosen the screw 1 to make an adjustment of the position of the adjusting plate 2 F 2 74 F 2 75 1 If the adjusting plate is moved to the right 2 the margin of the front edge of the paper narrows 7 Attach the cover etc by the reverse procedure to detach them handle front right cover pickup vertical path cover cassette 1 2 1 2 L2 2 1 ...

Page 93: ... Register Paper Type of Cassette 2 or Heavy 7 Service Mode Select COPIER OPTION BODY PASCAL 8 Check that the setup value is 1 9 Press RESET twice and get out from the service mode 10 Press Registration 11 Select Adjustment Cleaning Automatic Gradation Adjustment Plain or Heavy Full Adjust Test Print 1 In a response test print 1 will be printed 12 Place the test print 1 on the reading glass by foll...

Page 94: ...e from the host has come If it fails to get a response from the host ask the user s system administrator to check the network environment If there is a response from the host the network function of the machine works normally 2 4 Troubleshooting the Network 2 4 1 Summary Perform the following procedures only when connecting the machine to the network When connecting to the network fails the possib...

Page 95: ...opy Tray 2 5 1 Checking the Attachments Copy Tray N1 F 2 78 2 5 2 Turning Off the Host Machine How to Turn Off the Host Machine When turning off the host machine be sure to go through the following steps to protect the hard disk 1 Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more 2 Operate as instructed in the shut down sequence screen so that the main power switch will go off automatical...

Page 96: ...rew RS tightening M4X16 2 in the hole on the left side The copy tray base hereafter tray base is under appreciable force by a spring Be sure it remains bent and fixed in place Unless it is firmly in place you can get your hand trapped or the tray can fall out possibly causing injuries F 2 80 3 With the screw 2 fitted in the tray base 1 fit it to the host machine using the other screw RS tightening...

Page 97: ...rews F 2 84 When detaching the delivery tray be sure to do so while keeping the tray up Otherwise the force of the spring will snap up the tray base possibly causing injuries 2 6 Installing the Card Reader 2 6 1 Checking Contents Card Reader D1 F 2 85 2 6 2 Installation Procedures 1 Remove the face cap 1 and the 2 screws 2 and then detach the card reader cover 3 F 2 86 1 2 2 3 3 1 1 Card Reader 1 ...

Page 98: ...on to insert the card on the surface F 2 89 4 Attach the grounding wire 1 with the truss head screw 2 included in the package and then connect the card reader connector 3 with the main body connector F 2 90 5 Attach the card reader cover with the screws removed in the step 1 6 Turn ON the main power 7 Enter the Service mode 8 Select COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD and then enter a given number from 1...

Page 99: ...from Initial Settings Registration 5 Be sure that without selecting Initial Settings Registration System Administration Settings System Administrator Information Settings and then registering System Administration Department ID and System Administration Password Card Registration to the Device cannot be executed in the iWAM settings Select Initial Settings Registration System Administration Settin...

Page 100: ...rs 1 and 2 stepped screws 2 to the upper right cover of the machine F 2 93 3 Attach the cut off 2 of the reinforcement plate of the original holder 1 to the attached stepped screws 3 F 2 94 2 8 Installing the Key Switch Unit 2 8 1 Checking Contents Key Switch Unit A2 F 2 95 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 1 ...

Page 101: ...cover 1 1 screw 2 F 2 97 3 Detach the upper right cover 1 2 screws 2 F 2 98 4 Cut off the A area of the upper right cover detached in the step 3 using nippers etc F 2 99 5 Attach the key switch unit to the cut off of the upper right stay in the direction of the arrow F 2 100 1 Key Switch Unit 1 pc 2 Control Key 1 pc 3 Screw binding M4x6 1 pc 1 2 2 1 1 2 A 1 2 ...

Page 102: ...he manual feeding tray 2 8 3 Checking After the Installation 1 Enter the Service mode 2 Select COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL KEY and enter 1 3 Turn off the power supply switch by following the shut down sequence 4 Turn on the main power supply switch 5 Check that the message Set the control key is displayed on the control panel screen 6 Insert the Control Key and check that making a copy is possible 2 1...

Page 103: ...Cord guide Use 4 in this machine 7 pc 6 Voice board 1 pc 7 Voice board face plate 1 pc 8 Voice board face plate 1 pc 9 Screw Binding M3X6 2 pc 10 Screw Binding M4X6 1 pc 11 Screw Binding M4X40 2 pc 12 Screw Binding M3X16 1 pc 13 Screw Binding M4X16 1 pc 14 Ferrite core 1 pc 15 Clamp 1 pc 16 User s Guide 1 pc 17 17 User Manual CD ROM 1 pc Not used in this machine 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 14 15 11 12 13 7...

Page 104: ...he shut down sequence screen so that the main power switch will go off automatically 3 Disconnect the power cable for the power outlet 2 9 3 Installation Procedures 1 Points to note when installing the voice guidance kit 1 Free the reader communication cable 1 reader power supply cable 2 from the 4 clamps 3 and then disconnect the connector 4 F 2 103 2 Detach the rear upper cover 1 10 screws 2 F 2...

Page 105: ...f the factory setting F 2 108 The slide switch SW1 on the voice board is mounted to switch between 33MHz and 66MHz in accordance with the transfer speed of PCI bus If the position of the switch does not match the transfer speed the voice is not correctly played such as the interruption If you move the switch by mistake be sure to return it to the correct position In this machine the switch should ...

Page 106: ...ure it with the 2 screws 2 that have been removed in step 7 When inserting the voice board into the connector be sure that the voice board is vertical against the connector F 2 111 F 2 112 9 Go through the following steps to attach the removed parts Controller box cover Rear upper cover 10 Fix the reader communication cable with the clamp 2 1 1 1 1 J1052 J1052 2 1 ...

Page 107: ...4X40 2 F 2 114 14 Mount the speaker unit upper 1 on the speaker unit lower that has been mounted in step 13 and fix them with the screw Binding M4X6 2 from underneath F 2 115 15 Slide out the cord guide cover 1 F 2 116 16 Remove the released paper from the cord guide 1 and attach the guide to the host machine as shown in the figure Be careful not to cover the screw hole 2 entirely or partially wit...

Page 108: ...ide 1 On the back 3 locations F 2 118 17 Plug the cable 2 into the speaker unit F 2 119 18 Route the cable 1 through the cord guide 2 and slide in the cord guide cover 3 On the right 1 location F 2 120 Put the cable through under the reader power supply cable 4 On the back 3 locations 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 ...

Page 109: ...oice Board is displayed that means that the voice board is correctly recognized 3 Setting after the installation To use the voice guidance kit A2 after power on it is necessary to set the followings 1 Select Initial Registration System Setting Voice Guide Management Settings Use Voice Guide 2 Select ON key 3 Press OK key Default OFF 4 Checking the Operation When using the voice guidance 1 Press Re...

Page 110: ...Chapter 3 BASIC OPERATION ...

Page 111: ...Contents Contents 3 1 Construction 3 1 3 1 1 Functional Construction 3 1 3 2 Basic Sequence 3 2 3 2 1 Basic Sequence When the Power Is ON 3 2 3 2 2 Basic Sequence of Operations 3 4 ...

Page 112: ...ntrol 4 Photosensitive drum M 12 Duplex feeder 5 Photosensitive drum C 13 Cassette 1 6 Photosensitive drum Bk 14 Cassette 2 7 Delivery system 15 Cassette 3 8 Fixing system 16 Cassette 4 7 8 2 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 4 5 6 Original exposure system Reader control system 1 10 General control system Main controller Printer control system DC controller Side paper deck option Image formation system Pickup...

Page 113: ...nterval between the completion of the shading correction and switching the Start key ON turning the main power OFF WMUP Warm up An interval in which the drive system stops and it ends when the completion requirements of the fixing assembly startup is fulfilled WMUPR Warm up Rotation An interval in which the drive system starts and the bias adjustment is executed PSTBY Printer Standby An interval i...

Page 114: ...Chapter 3 3 3 F 3 2 IH Heater H1 H2 M1 90 WMUP WMUPR PSTBY In the iR C5180 and 230 U model it starts when the main power switch is turned ON HP Sensor STBY SREADY HP Shading position HP Shading position ...

Page 115: ... the completion of the shading correction and switching the Start key ON turning the main power OFF PSTBY Print Standby State An interval in which the copy print request signal can be accepted PINTR Printer Initial Rotation An interval between the reception of the print request signal and the state the image signal is sent PRINT An interval in which all toner is transferred on the paper and the pa...

Page 116: ... F 3 3 PSTBY PSTBY PINTR LSTR PRINT iRC5180 1 65 iRC4560 3880 1 45 M20 23 Y M C Bk M12 15 Y M C Bk M6 SL3 M9 M8 M24 IH Heater H1 H2 M1 M2 M5 Y M C Bk 1 iRC5180 iRC4580 3880 230V only 1 ON STBY STBY SREADY SCRW SCFW ...

Page 117: ...ading correction and switching the Start key ON turning the main power OFF PSTBY Print Standby State An interval in which the copy print request signal can be accepted PINTR Printer Initial Rotation An interval between the reception of the print request signal and the state the image signal is sent PRINT An interval in which all toner is transferred on the paper and the paper is delivered LSTR Las...

Page 118: ...Chapter 3 3 7 F 3 4 PSTBY PSTBY PINTR LSTR PRINT Bk M23 Bk M15 M6 SL3 M9 M8 M24 IH Heater H1 H2 M1 ITOP Signal Bk M5 iRC5180 1 65 iRC4560 3880 1 45 ON STBY STBY SREADY SCRW SCFW ...

Page 119: ...Chapter 4 BASIC OPERATIONS AS A PRINTER ...

Page 120: ...f the Electrical Circuitry 4 1 4 1 1 Configuration of Main PCBs 4 1 4 1 2 DC Controller PCB 1 IMG 4 2 4 1 3 DC Controller PCB 2 MAISY 4 4 4 2 Basic Sequence 4 6 4 2 1 Basic Sequence of Operations 4 6 4 2 2 Basic Sequence of Operations 4 7 ...

Page 121: ...on PCB Y 9 IH Power PCB 20 HV3 PCB 31 BD Detection PCB Y 10 DC DC Converter PCB 12 5 3 3V 21 HV4 PCB Y M 11 DC DC Converter PCB 38V 1 22 HV4 PCB C Bk 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 J301 J511 J1014 J1015 J2608 J504 J2612 J502 J2616 J501 J2620 J500 13 14 15 16 J72Y J72M J72C J72K J73 J75 J77 J79 J71Y J71M J71C J71K J84YM J73YM J74 J78 J73CK J84YM J84CK J85 J92 J691 J150 J151 J252...

Page 122: ...the signal direction 4 1 2 DC Controller PCB 1 IMG The main IC functions of the DC controller PCB 1 IMG is shown below F 4 2 IC6 IC24 IC5 IC10 IC9 IC14 IC13 IC18 IC17 IC19 IC20 IC15 IC16 IC11 IC12 IC7 IC8 IC4 IC2 IC3 IC1 J301 J214 J210 J208 J206 J212 J1 J2 J205 J204 J215 J203 J202 BATTERY ...

Page 123: ...IMG C IC4 IMG K IC5 to 8 PWM Y Execute the pulse width modulation depending on the density of the image data that is received in parallel and output 5 to 8 For A to D beams of the Y laser 9 to 12 For A to D beams of the M laser 13 to 16 For A to D beams of the C laser 17 to 20 For A to D beams of the K laser IC9 to 12 PWM M IC13 to 16 PWM C IC17 to 20 PWM K IC21 CPU IC22 EEPROM Embedded startup pr...

Page 124: ...3 DC Controller PCB 2 MAISY The main IC functions of the DC controller PCB 2 MAISY is shown below F 4 3 IC1 IC2 IC3 IC4 J108 J109 J112 J113 J116 J114 J115 J117 J110 J104 J102 J101 J119 J105 J118 J120 J100 J107 J103 J106 ...

Page 125: ...IC2 I O Everything that can be controlled with the digital values Input of each sensor Fan Motor Control Solenoid Clutch Control High Voltage Control Excludes the analog value IC3 IC4 MAISY 1 Stepping Motor Control Pickup Motor Pre registration Motor Registration Motor Duplexing Motor Developing Assembly Motor Y M C K 2 Toner Container Motor Y M C K Control 3 High Voltage Clock Generation 4 Drum I...

Page 126: ...hen the completion requirements of the fixing assembly startup is fulfilled WMUPR Warm up Rotation An interval in which the drive system starts and the bias adjustment is executed PSTBY Printer Standby An interval in which the copy print request signal can be accepted IH Heater H1 H2 M1 90 WMUP WMUPR PSTBY In the iR C5180 and 230 U model it starts when the main power switch is turned ON ...

Page 127: ...itial Rotation An interval between the reception of the print request signal and the state the image signal is sent PRINT An interval in which all toner is transferred on the paper and the paper is delivered LSTR Last Rotation An interval between the completion of the paper delivery and the stop of all drives PSTBY PSTBY PINTR LSTR PRINT iRC5180 1 65 iRC4560 3880 1 45 M20 23 Y M C Bk M12 15 Y M C ...

Page 128: ...tial Rotation An interval between the reception of the print request signal and the state the image signal is sent PRINT An interval in which all toner is transferred on the paper and the paper is delivered LSTR Last Rotation An interval between the completion of the paper delivery and the stop of all drives PSTBY PSTBY PINTR LSTR PRINT Bk M23 Bk M15 M6 SL3 M9 M8 M24 IH Heater H1 H2 M1 ITOP Signal...

Page 129: ...Chapter 5 MAIN CONTROLLER ...

Page 130: ... Image Data 5 17 5 6 1 Flow of Image Data for Copier Functions 5 17 5 6 2 Flow of Image Data for Box Functions 5 18 5 6 3 Flow of Image Data for SEND Functions 5 19 5 6 4 Flow of Image Data for Fax Transmission Functions 5 20 5 6 5 Flow of Image Data for Fax Reception Functions 5 21 5 6 6 Flow of Image Data for PDL Functions 5 22 5 7 Parts Replacement Procedure 5 23 5 7 1 Main Controller Box 5 23 ...

Page 131: ...ersion direct mapping color balance fine zoom adjustment gradation conversion screen processing trimming add on 4 Main Controller Circuit Board SUB SJ A Scanner interface scanner image processing resolution conversion image rotation compression decompression 5 Main Controller Circuit Board SUB LAN bar A LAN connection HDD controller HDD power supply 6 BOOT ROM ROM memory storing the boot program 7...

Page 132: ...Chapter 5 5 2 F 5 1 A Reader Unit B DC controller Circuit Board C Printer Unit A B C HDD 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 133: ...y 1GB DDR SDRAM standard J1002 Image memory 512 MB DDR SDRAM 1 J1003 SRAM circuit board connector slot J1008 Main Controller Circuit Board SUB PDRM EF A connector slot J1010 Main Controller Circuit Board SUB R A connector slot J1011 Main Controller Circuit Board SUB SJ A connector slot J1012 Option board connector slot Security expansion board J1001 J1034 J1013 J1012 J1011 J1008 J1051 J1010 J1052 ...

Page 134: ...oard SUB LAN bar A connector slot J1024 Main Controller Circuit Board SUB RB A connector slot 1 J1034 BOOTROM connector slot J1051 Main Controller Circuit Board SUB PDRM EF A connector slot J1052 Option board connector slot Voice guidance board IC No Function IC1 2 SRAM Saves image data management information service mode settings data and user mode settings data saved on the HDD J No Function BAT...

Page 135: ... and turning off the power can cause a fault E602 on the HDD 5 3 2 Start Up Sequence Start Up Sequence Boot Program Area Boot Program interval 1 The boot program is executed by the CPU on the main controller PCB when the main power switch is turned on making checks on the image memory DDR SDRAM and the HDD condition An error code will be indicated if a fault is detected If the check ends normally ...

Page 136: ...he start up sequence ends when the printer and scanner are correctly recognized Otherwise an error code E732 E733 will be indicated at the end of a connection time out The engine becomes ready to accept a job when the start up sequence ends normally Its control panel displays the control screen and the Start key LED changes from red to green F 5 6 1 3 2 ...

Page 137: ...Chapter 5 5 7 F 5 7 CPU HDD ROM Main controller PCB main access to the program at time of execution flow of system program operations System software ...

Page 138: ...Chapter 5 5 8 F 5 8 CPU HDD ROM access to the program at time of execution ...

Page 139: ...rvice Mode cannot be entered perform the following procedure 1 2 Turn the power OFF Turn the power ON again while holding down the 1 and 9 keys This will automatically start the Write Abort Sector repair routine causing the screen to go completely black 1 3 Progress status will appear after a short time as this routine takes about 40 to 50 minutes to execute Execution is done when the screen goes ...

Page 140: ...s at once Specify FSTDEV 3 partitions at once 2 IMG_MNG Image management data etc 1 5 9 10 11 12 3 FSTCDEV Image data save area for Chasing 1 5 9 10 11 12 4 THUMDE V Thumbnail 1 5 9 10 11 12 5 2 APL_GEN General purpose data save area 1 5 9 10 11 12 General Possible 4 partitions at once Specify APL_GE N 4 partitions at once 6 TMP_GEN General purpose data save data temporary files 1 5 9 10 11 12 Gen...

Page 141: ...D CHECK may take anywhere from several minutes to several tens of minutes and then turn the power OFF and then ON again 3 If the above does not restore the system enter Download Mode perform a full format using SST reinstall the system System Lang RUI and turn the Main Power Switch OFF and then ON again 3 03 Write Abort during startup Repair operations in the boot partition can only be performed w...

Page 142: ...em Lang RUI and turn the Main Power Switch OFF and then ON again 3 If the above still does not correct the problem the HDD may be assumed to be damaged so replace the HDD and reinstall the system 10 11 21 Faulty HDD connection or similar problem This error is not usually generated at the read write level 1 Check cables and connectors 2 If the above does not correct the problem the HDD may be assum...

Page 143: ...Chapter 5 5 13 5 5 Image Processing 5 5 1 Overview of the Flow of Image Data F 5 9 SEND FAX PullScan E Mail BOX PDL Print PC Original Copy A A A Print output Scan Image data Other iR machine ...

Page 144: ... CMYK RGB 24 Processing taking the place of conventional masking Executes color correction for the CCD RGB filters If mono color mode only Bk signals hereafter See though prevention BE Bk generation mono color mode Framing Blanking Frame erasing Input direct mapping Edge enhancement Smoothing RGB phase correction Input gamma correction Main controller PCB sub SJ A sub R A sub PDRM PE A Reader unit...

Page 145: ...ustment Color balance correction Framing Blanking Background removal Bk generation Output direct mapping RGB CMY conversion Output gamma correction Optimum screen selection Smoothing RGB 24 CMYK 32 Image area signal Here the Bk signal is generated if an ACS session identifies the original as being black and white Otherwise it is let through For the text area UCR processing is executed A correction...

Page 146: ...a for compression decompression and editing F 5 12 4 Image area signal DDR SDRAM HDD PC PDL input Magnification processing Resolution conversion Rotation Color conversion Binary processing JPEG compression JPEG compression JPEG decompression JPEG decompression Main controller PCB main sub IC1 RGB 24 Reader unit ...

Page 147: ...tions The following shows the flow of image data when a copier function is being used F 5 13 Main controller PCB main sub R A sub PDRM EF A Reader unit Rotation JPEG compression JPEG decompression DC controller PCB RGB 24 Image signal DDR SDRAM HDD Magnification Color conversion ...

Page 148: ...owing shows the flow of image data when a Box function is being used F 5 14 Main controller PCB main sub SJ A sub R A sub PDRM EF A Reader unit Rotation Resolution conversion JPEG compression JPEG decompression DC controller PCB RGB 24 Image area signal DDR SDRAM HDD ...

Page 149: ...ta when a SEND function is used F 5 15 Reader unit Rotation Resolution conversion JPEG compression JPEG decompression RGB 24 Image signal DDR SDRAM HDD Main controller PCB sub LAN bar A MMR compression Binary processing For black and white image Main controller PCB main sub SJ A sub R A sub PDRM EF A ...

Page 150: ...shows the flow of image data when a fax transmission function is being used F 5 16 Reader unit Rotation Resolution conversion JPEG compression JPEG decompression RGB Image area signal SDRAM HDD Fax unit Binary processing MMR compression Main controller PCB main sub SJ A sub R A sub PE A ...

Page 151: ... Image Data for Fax Reception Functions The following shows the flow of image data when a fax reception function is being used F 5 17 Main controller PCB main sub Rotation Resolution conversion SDRAM HDD Fax unit DC controller PCB ...

Page 152: ...s being used F 5 18 JPEG decompression DDR SDRAM HDD Main controller PCB main sub JPEG compression DC controller PCB LIPS data RGB JPEGTIFF PDF RGB CMYK DISPLAY LIST data LIPS LX LIPS V PS Expansion Kit PS PS Print Server Unit Direct Print Expansion Kit PS data Main controller PCB sub R0 B Main controller PCB sub LAN bar A ...

Page 153: ...n Controller Box 1 Remove the main controller box cover 3 1 harness free from wire saddle 1 15 screws 2 F 5 19 2 Remove the main controller box 3 13 connectors on PCB 6 clamps 1 6 screws 2 F 5 20 5 7 2 Main Controller PCB main 5 7 2 1 Preparation for Removing the Main Controller PCB main 1 Remove the rear upper cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Upper Cover 2 Remove the rear left cover u...

Page 154: ...plate 2 screws 1 1 connectors 2 F 5 22 3 Remove the main controller PCB sub SJ A 3 together with its mounting plate 2 screws 1 1 connector 2 F 5 23 4 Remove the main controller PCB sub LAN A 4 together with its mounting plate 2 connectors 1 2 screws 2 1 connector 3 F 5 24 Points to Note When Removing the HDD Take care to avoid static damage when removing the HDD It is also important to protect the...

Page 155: ...er PCB sub RB A 4 Skip this step if there is no main controller PCB sub RB A 2 screws 1 1 mounting plate 2 1 connector 3 F 5 27 Points to Note When Mounting the Main Controller PCB sub RB A Check to be sure that the PCB 3 is between the mounting plate 1 and the leaf spring 2 F 5 28 8 Remove the image memory SDRAM 1 1 2 2 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 3 4 1 1 2 3 ...

Page 156: ...r 5 5 26 F 5 29 F 5 30 9 Press the PCB release button 1 to detach the boot ROM PCB 2 F 5 31 10 Remove the SRAM PCB 1 F 5 32 11 Remove the main controller PCB main 3 8 screws 1 1 connector 2 F 5 33 1 1 2 1 1 1 ...

Page 157: ...eft Cover Upper 3 Remove the left rear cover upper page 12 21 Reference Removing the Left Rear Cover Upper 5 7 3 2 Removing the Main Controller PCB sub R A 1 Remove the main controller box cover 3 1 harness free from wire saddle 1 15 screws 2 F 5 34 2 Remove the main controller PCB sub R A 3 together with its mounting plate 2 screws 1 1 connector 2 F 5 35 3 Remove the main controller PCB sub R A 3...

Page 158: ...they may be removed in the same way 2 screws 1 1 connector 2 F 5 37 3 Remove the main controller PCB sub PDRM A 3 from the mounting plate 2 2 screws 1 F 5 38 5 7 5 Main Controller PCB sub SJ A 5 7 5 1 Preparation for Removing the Main Controller PCB sub SJ A 1 Remove the rear upper cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Upper Cover 2 Remove the rear left cover upper page 12 23 Reference Remo...

Page 159: ...2 connectors 1 2 screws 2 1 connector 3 F 5 40 3 Remove the main controller PCB sub LAN A 3 from the mounting plate 2 2 screws 1 F 5 41 5 7 7 Main Controller PCB sub RB A 5 7 7 1 Preparation for Removing the Main Controller PCB sub RB A 1 Remove the rear upper cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Upper Cover 2 Remove the rear left cover upper page 12 23 Reference Removing the Rear Left Cov...

Page 160: ...emove the main controller PCB sub RB A 4 Skip this step if there is no main controller PCB sub RB A 2 screws 1 1 mounting plate 2 1 connector 3 F 5 44 Points to Note When Mounting the Main Controller PCB sub RB A Check to be sure that the PCB 3 is between the mounting plate 1 and the leaf spring F 5 45 1 2 2 3 3 4 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 3 4 1 1 2 3 ...

Page 161: ...ted history related files There will be no error operation and initialization will take place automatically Å If you pull out the SRAM PCB from machine B and mount it to machine A the PCB will be initialized and be rendered useless for machine A or B Take full care 1 When you turn on the power after replacing the SRAM PCB the machine will perform automatic initialization and will indicate a messag...

Page 162: ...ence Removing the Rear Upper Cover 2 Remove the rear left cover upper page 12 23 Reference Removing the Rear Left Cover Upper 3 Remove the left rear cover upper page 12 21 Reference Removing the Left Rear Cover Upper 5 7 10 2 Removing the Image Memory SDRAM PCB 1 Remove the main controller box cover 3 Referring to Procedure 5 7 3 2 Points to Note When Removing the HDD Take care to avoid static dam...

Page 163: ...fter going through steps 1 and 2 above perform the following 1 Set the following in service mode Select the following COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD then enter the number of the first card and press OK For instance if cards No 1 through No 1000 are used for group control enter 1 2 Turn off and then on the machine when the machine has started up perform the following in user mode Select the following...

Page 164: ...12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Upper Cover 2 Remove the rear left cover upper page 12 23 Reference Removing the Rear Left Cover Upper 3 Remove the left rear cover upper page 12 21 Reference Removing the Left Rear Cover Upper 5 7 12 2 Removing the Controller Fan 1 Remove the controller fan 3 1 connector 1 2 screws 2 1 2 2 3 ...

Page 165: ...Chapter 6 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM ...

Page 166: ...11 6 3 3 Controlling the Scanning Lamp 6 11 6 3 3 1 Overview 6 11 6 3 3 2 Scanning Lamp 6 12 6 3 3 3 Turning On and Off the Scanning Lamp 6 12 6 3 4 Detecting the Size of Originals 6 12 6 3 4 1 Identifying the Size of Originals 6 12 6 3 4 2 Points of Measurement Used for Original Size Identification 6 13 6 3 4 3 Overview of Operation 6 15 6 3 5 Dirt Sensor Control 6 17 6 3 5 1 Stream Reading Dust ...

Page 167: ...e PCB 6 27 6 4 5 Inverter PCB 6 28 6 4 6 CCD Unit 6 29 6 4 7 Scanner Motor 6 30 6 4 8 ADF Open Close Sensor 6 31 6 4 9 Scanner HP Sensor 6 32 6 4 10 Original Sensor 6 33 6 4 11 Cooling Fan 6 33 6 4 12 Scanner Drive Cable 6 34 ...

Page 168: ...1 Lens single focus fixed Magnification 50 100 or digital variable reproduction ratio mode 25 to 400 50 100 or digital variable reproduction ratio mode 25 to 400 main scanning direction image processing by controller block sub scanning direction image processing by controller block Scanner drive control No 1 No 2 mirror base by pulse motor M501 Original scanning lamp 1 activation control by invert...

Page 169: ... using the ADF open closed sensor 5 deg ADF open closed sensor 2 PS503 detects the size with the ADF at 25 deg or less Original size sensor AB configuration detects the size in sub scanning direction AB configuration Original size sensor inch configuration detects the size in sub scanning direction inch configuration Mirror No 1 No 2 No 3 mirror Interface PCB Anti condensation sensor Original scan...

Page 170: ... CCD No 1 mirror No 1 mirror base No 2 mirror No 2 mirror base No 3 mirror HP Image HP leading edge Size detection Stream reading position start position forward reverse Scanner motor Light blocking plate No 2 mirror base Original scanning lamp No 1 mirror base Scanner HP sensor ...

Page 171: ...3 J303 J306 J309 J203 J204 J601 J202 J602 J205 J206 J308 J201 J209 J307 J310 Inverter PCB Original scanning lamp Original scanning lamp activation control CCD unit Scanner motor Scanner motor drive control Scanner HP sensor ADF open closed sensor 1 ADF open closed sensor 2 Reader controller PCB Interface PCB To printer main controller Reader cocling FAN To ADF ...

Page 172: ...J204 used for connection with the CCD unit J205 used for connection with the CCD unit J206 used for connection with the inverter PCB J207 used for connection with the original size sensor AB configuration J208 used for connection with the original size sensor inch configuration J209 not used J210 not used J203 J202 J210 J209 IC1 CPU IC2 J201 DF J204 J207 J205 J206 J208 IC3 Original size sensor AB ...

Page 173: ...ion Offset correction Forward Reverse shift shading fixed shading white plate dust detection control shading correction HP shading position 1 HP positioning 2 CCD LIVE control gain correction 3 move to shift shading start position Start position Shading position Image leading edge Original size detection position 1 shifts only if the copyboard ADF is open 4 shift shading 5 fixed shading white plat...

Page 174: ...L control 1 Forward Reverse shift shading fixed shading white plate dust detection control shading correction 1 controls by turning on off the power of the CCD and the circuitry around it for power saving and for protection against overheating 1 HP positioning 2 move to shift shading start position 6 Original scann 7 HPposition move to shift Start position Shading position Image leading edge Stop ...

Page 175: ...t detection control shading correction 1 controls by turning on off the power of the CCD and the circuitry around it for power saving and for protection against overheating CCD KILL control 1 1 HP positioning 2 move to shift shading start position 6 original stream reading scan 7 shifts to point of dust detection Stream reading position Shading position Image leading edge Stop position Original si...

Page 176: ...r PS501 Detection Signal used in reference to the detection of the No 1 mirror base at its home position 3 ADF Open Closed Sensor 1 PS502 Detection Signal used in reference to the detection of the state open closed of the ADF 4 ADF Open Closed Sensor 2 PS503 Detection Signal used in reference to the detection of the state open closed of the ADF 1 2 3 4 Reader drive PCB Interface PCB forward revers...

Page 177: ...anner Forward for an Image Scan When making an image scan the No 1 mirror base unit is moved by controlling the motor as follows F 6 14 Reader controller PCB Motor driver Interface PCB 24V 15V J306 A A B B CPU 1 2 3 4 6 5 J308 J307 J202 J203 Scanner motor M501 1 1 Scanner motor control signal Start position Acceleration Image leading edge Normal speed Image trailing edge Deceleration Stop Shift sp...

Page 178: ...ted control mechanisms operating as follows 1 Turning On and Off the Scanning Lamp The scanning lamp is turned on or off by the drive signal XE ON generated by the CPU of the reader controller PCB When the signal is generated the inverter PCB generates high frequency high voltage using the activation control circuit from the drive voltage 24V supplied by the reader controller PCB thus turning on t...

Page 179: ... xenon lamp ä òAÉGÉâÅ ÉRÅ ÉhÅF Relevant Error Code E220 Lamp ON fault when the power is ON Inverter PCB fault reader controller PCB fault or scanning lamp fault 6 3 4 Detecting the Size of Originals 6 3 4 1 Identifying the Size of Originals The machine identifies the size of an original based on combinations of measurements taken of the light reflected by specific points using a reflection type se...

Page 180: ...ccuracy of original size identification as when the original is displaced while the ADF is closed the machine makes use of the following 2 types of mechanisms 1 Presence Absence of an Original at 2 Points for each point of measurement For each point of measurement in main scanning direction the machine checks the presence absence of an original with reference to the CCD output at 2 points near the...

Page 181: ...an original is indicated at the front the machine will give priority to the indication at the front i e presence of an original F 6 19 T 6 6 Result of measurement Result of detection A B no no original absent yes yes original present no yes original present yes yes original present Point of detection yes no Size identified 1 yes yes 2 no yes 3 yes yes 4 no no Result B5 Document size sensor 1 CCD o...

Page 182: ...s that detect external light external search The ADF open closed sensor 2 identifies the condition as being closed and the machine starts original size identification At this position B5 B4 A4 and A3 are excluded from the list of possible sizes 3 2 The machine executes an external light search for main scanning direction it turns on the xenon lamp to check its light reflected at 4 points using the...

Page 183: ...fies the size of the original based on the combination of changes at 5 points F 6 24 5 Standby in wait for a press on the Start key No 1 mirror base at point of original detection xenon lamp off original sensor off F 6 25 F 6 26 25 5 1 A B 2 A B 3 A B 4 A B 1 A B 2 A B 3 A B Original size A3 B4 A4R A4 B5 B5R A5 B6 absent Original sensor 1 Point of CCD detection AB Configuration Original size 11 x1...

Page 184: ...t read F 6 27 Executed only if dust has been detected at all points i e A B C D and E in the previous job If so the machine uses the point with least dust as the reading position and executes dust correction before starting reading operation 2 Particulars of Control 1 at the end of a job makes a change to the point of stream reading dust reading position The machine checks the light reflected by t...

Page 185: ...position at the end of the previous job 2 point with no dust or little dust T 6 7 A reading reference position 1 0 mm to the left from the center of the platen roller B 1 0 mm to the left from the reference position C 0 5 mm to the left from the reference position D 0 5 mm to the right from the reference position E 1 0 mm to the right from the reference position center of the platen roller A D E p...

Page 186: ...ate dust detection b white plate dust correction F 6 29 2 Particulars of Control 1 White Plate Dust Detection The machine compares the shading coefficient obtained from shift shading and the shading coefficient obtained from fixed shading to identify the presence absence of dust and if any coordinates and width of the area 2 White Plate Dust Correction If the machine detects dust as a result of wh...

Page 187: ...putation of shading coefficient from fixed shading to shading correction position Detection of coordinates of start of dust and width Correction of dust area coefficient using data of both sides Fixing shading position Shading correction position Reference area Shading coefficient computation area White plate Area of dust Comparison ...

Page 188: ...mage processing for every RGB line using the reader controller PCB and the major functions involved are as follows 1 Analog Image processing a CCD drive b CCD output gain correction offset correction c CCD output A D conversion F 6 32 CCD AP PCB Reader controller PCB CCD A D conversion Shading processing Analog image processing Analog image processing block Controller block Digital image processin...

Page 189: ... correction are then converted into 10 bit digital signals by the A D converter according to their pixel voltage levels 6 3 6 5 Outline of Shading Correction The output of the CCD may not always be uniform because of the following reasons even when the density of the original in question is uniform variation in the sensitivity among individual pixels of the CCD difference in the level of transmiss...

Page 190: ...rom the scanning lamp against the standard white plate and converts the reflected light into a digital signal by the analog image processing block on the CCD AP PCB The result i e a digital signal representing the intensity of the reflected light is sent to the shading correction circuit of the reader controller PCB as a shading coefficient The shading correction circuit in turn compares the coeff...

Page 191: ... 2 Exposure Lamp 6 4 2 1 Preparation for Removing the Scanning Lamp 1 Remove Copyboard Glass 2 Remove the Reader Right Cover 3 Remove the Reader Left Cover 4 Remove the Reader Front Cover 5 Remove the Reader Rear Cover 6 Remove the CCD unit cover 2 Referring to Procedure 6 4 6 6 4 2 2 Removing the Scanning Lamp 1 Remove the cable 2 from the cable guide 3 connector 1 F 6 37 2 Move the No 1 mirror b...

Page 192: ... sure to print out the settings using P PRINT before replacing the reader controller 1 Remove the Copyboard Glass 2 Remove the CCD unit cover 2 Referring to Procedure 6 4 6 3 Remove the Original Size Sensor Unit 3 1 Remove the original size detection unit 2 3 screws 1 F 6 40 3 2 Remove the original size sensor unit 2 connector 1 F 6 41 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 ...

Page 193: ...reby eliminating the need for the following adjustment work 1 Reader Unit Related Adjustment 1 Using the SST download the latest system software R CON 2 Make the following selections in service mode and press the OK key to initialize the RAM COPIER FUNCTION CLER R CON Then turn off and then on the main power 3 Enter the following settings in service mode 1 standard while plate white level data COP...

Page 194: ...ings indicated on the P PRINT printout you have previously obtained 1 original stop position adjustment FEEDER ADJUST DOCST 2 original feed speed magnification adjustment FEEDER ADJUST LA SPEED 2 Make the following adjustments using the following service mode items 1 ADF sensor sensitivity adjustment FEEDER FUNCTION SENS IN 2 tray width adjustment FEEDER FUNCTION TRY A4 FEEDER FUNCTION TRY A5R FEE...

Page 195: ...s closer to the motor than the wire guide 2 the harness will come into contact with the rotor and suffer damage Be sure that the tie wrap is closer to the interface PCB than the wire guide F 6 49 6 4 5 Inverter PCB 6 4 5 1 Preparation for Removing the Inverter PCB 1 Remove the Copyboard Glass 2 Remove the CCD unit cover 2 Referring to Procedure 6 4 6 6 4 5 2 Removing the Inverter PCB 1 Remove the ...

Page 196: ...ng the CCD Unit 1 Remove the CCD unit 4 2 flat cables 1 from the reader controller PCB 2 screws 2 2 leaf springs 3 F 6 52 6 4 6 3 After Replacing the CCD Unit If you have replaced the CCD unit be sure to enter the settings indicated on the label attached to the CCD unit COPIER ADJUST CCD CCDU RG to enter the correction value for CCD dependent RG color displacement in sub scanning direction COPIER ...

Page 197: ...eparation for Removing the Scanner Motor 1 Remove the reader rear cover 6 4 7 2 Removing the Scanner Motor 1 Remove the cover 2 4 screws 1 F 6 54 2 Remove the 2 harness retainers 2 from the back of the cover 1 to remove the cover F 6 55 3 Move the scanner motor 3 in the direction of the arrow to remove 3 screws 1 2 springs 2 F 6 56 4 Remove the scanner motor 2 connector 1 F 6 57 2 1 30524101 CCDU ...

Page 198: ...than the wire guide 2 the harness can come into contact with the rotor of the scanner motor and suffer damage Be sure that the tie wrap is closer to the interface PCB than the wire guide when mounting the scanner motor F 6 60 6 4 8 ADF Open Close Sensor 6 4 8 1 Preparation for Removing the ADF Open Close Sensor 1 Remove the reader rear cover 6 4 8 2 Removing the ADF Open Closed Sensor 1 Disconnect...

Page 199: ...canner HP Sensor 6 4 9 1 Preparation for Removing the Mirror Base Home Position Sensor 1 Remove the reader rear cover 6 4 9 2 Removing the Mirror Base Home Position Sensor 1 Remove the ADF open closed sensor cover 2 2 Remove the sensor mounting plate 2 screw 1 F 6 64 3 Remove the home position sensor 1 connector 1 F 6 65 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 ...

Page 200: ...unit 2 3 screws 1 F 6 66 3 2 Remove the original size sensor unit 2 connector 1 F 6 67 6 4 10 2 Removing the Original Size Sensor 1 While removing the claw at the edge remove the original size sensor 1 F 6 68 6 4 11 Cooling Fan 6 4 11 1 Preparation for Removing the Cooling Fan 1 Remove the Reader Rear Cover 6 4 11 2 Removing the Cooling Fan 1 Remove the cooling fan 4 1 connector 2 open the wire gu...

Page 201: ...rd Glass 2 Remove the Reader Right Cover 3 Remove the Reader Left Cover 4 Remove the Reader Front Cover 5 Remove the ADF 5 1 Remove the cable 1 of the ADF from the host machine F 6 70 5 2 Bend up the edge of the rubber cover 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then remove the angle guide plate 3 F 6 71 5 3 Remove the 3 knurled screws 1 and move the ADF toward the rear then lift it to detach 3 knurled scre...

Page 202: ...detach the right glass retainer 5 F 6 73 When attaching it be sure to hold down both ends of the leaf spring A with your fingers Take care not to bend the leaf spring Be sure to attach it while forcing the left glass retainer B against the reading glass C Check to make sure that the side of the reading glass and the leaf spring D of the left glass retainer are in firm contact Otherwise dust from t...

Page 203: ... 75 4 Remove the ADF right screw cover 2 screw 1 F 6 76 5 Remove the ADF left screw cover 2 the screw 1 F 6 77 6 Remove the interface PCB cover 3 4 RS tightening screws 1 2 binding screws 2 F 6 78 B C D 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 3 ...

Page 204: ... Cable Move the lock lever 1 in the direction of the arrow to release then detach the flat cable 2 F 6 80 8 Remove the interface PCB 2 9 screws 1 F 6 81 9 Disconnect the reader communication cable 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 2 F 6 82 10 Open the 3 wire saddles 1 and disconnect the connector 2 1 3 4 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 205: ...crews 3 F 6 83 12 Remove the motor frame 3 1 wire saddle 1 Remove the harness 6 screws 2 F 6 84 13 Remove the ADF open closed sensor cover 2 4 screws 1 F 6 85 14 Remove the harness from the wire saddle 3 2 connectors 1 snap open band 2 F 6 86 1 3 2 3 4 1 2 2 2 3 1 1 2 1 2 3 ...

Page 206: ... the reader upper frame 2 24 screws 1 F 6 88 17 Remove the 2 cable fixing screws 2 of the No 1 mirror base 1 18 Remove the spring 3 used to hold the cable in place 19 Remove the 2 hooks of the cable from the right side of the reader frame 20 Remove the cable from the pulleys F 6 89 1 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 4 4 1 3 ...

Page 207: ...ch it using tape or the like At this time be sure that the cable fixing 2 is on the inside 2 Engage the cable on the pulleys then engage one end of the cable on the hook 3 of the left side and the other end on the hook of the right side 3 Temporarily fix the cable fixing plate 2 in place to the No 1 mirror base 5 4 Attach the reader upper frame F 6 90 F 6 91 4 4 5 3 3 1 1 2 2 4 4 5 ...

Page 208: ... the machine F 6 93 3 Insert the pins of the mirror positioning tool front 2 rear 3 of the mirror positioning tool into the holes 1 of the No 1 mirror base No 2 mirror base and rail F 6 94 F 6 95 4 Fix the trailing rear edge of the wire which was temporarily tightened to the hook of the reader flame with the screw 5 Tighten the screws of front rear side of the wire fixing plate 6 Remove the mirror...

Page 209: ...Chapter 7 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM ...

Page 210: ...Contents Contents 7 1 Digital Image Processing 7 1 7 1 1 Overview 7 1 7 1 2 Shading Correction 7 1 ...

Page 211: ...al 1 Target value Correction This correction is performed by measuring each level R G B with the standard white plate to store these density data The memorized data is processed by computation to use as a target value at shading correction 2 Shading Correction This correction is performed at every scanning of the original By measuring the density of the standard white plate to compare the measured...

Page 212: ...Chapter LASER EXPOSURE 8 ...

Page 213: ...2 2 PWM Control 8 11 8 3 3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 8 12 8 3 3 1 Laser scanner motor control 8 12 8 3 3 2 Laser Scanner Motor Speed Change Control 8 13 8 3 4 Controlling the Laser Shutter 8 14 8 3 4 1 Laser shutter control 8 14 8 3 5 Correcting Image Displacement 8 15 8 3 5 1 Outline 8 15 8 3 5 2 Timing of Color Displacement Detection Correction 8 16 8 3 5 3 Detecting Correcting Color D...

Page 214: ...ca 37000rpm iR C4580 ca 33000rpm iR C4080 ca 29000rpm Type of bearing Oil Polygon mirror Number of facets 4 facets f20 Control mechanisms Sync control main scanning direction sub scanning direction Light intensity APC control PWM control Color displacement correction reproduction ratio in main scanning direction displacement in main scanning direction Others scanner motor control Laser Scanner Mot...

Page 215: ...orrects displacement of laser light coming from the guide mirror in main scanning direction displacement correction motor moves the corrective lens to correct displacement in main scanning direction BD detection PCB detects laser light as a BD signal BD mirror reflects the laser light in the direction of the BD detection PCB Displacement correction motor Photosensitive drum Polygon mirror Guide mi...

Page 216: ...on PCB BD mirror PWMIC J210 J633 J301 J118 J717 J1014 J206 Y M J208 C Bk APC control PWM signal ON OFF control Laser scanner motor control Front cover Fixing feeder unit Manual feed unit PWM control Laser shutter control DC controller PCB 1 IMG DC controller PCB 2 MAISY Main controller PCB IC for control IMG Image data Main scanning direction sync control ...

Page 217: ... PTOP The machine uses the signal to generate the sub scanning direction signals Y TOP M TOP C TOP K TOP for individual colors and turns on the lasers of the corresponding colors F 8 4 PSTBY PSTBY PINTR LSTR PRINT Laser Y activation Laser M activation Laser C activation Laser Bk activation PTOP signal Y TOP signal M TOP signal C TOP signal Bk TOP signal Polygon mirror motor Y M C Bk For stabilizat...

Page 218: ...the level of voltage that corresponds to the intensity of laser light short APC period used for sequence light emission DATA light emission in keeping with image data MEMO As many as 64 combinations are possible using 6 control signals The combinations in the table are limited to those used in the said sequence CTRL 2_1 CTRL 1_1 CTRL 0_1 CTRL 2_2 CTRL 1_2 CTRL 0_2 LD_A LD_B LD_C LD_D 0 0 0 0 0 0 D...

Page 219: ...Chapter 8 8 6 F 8 5 J206A Y M C BK DC controller PCB 1 IMG CTRL_0_1 CTRL_1_1 CTRL_2_1 CTRL_0_2 CTRL_1_2 CTRL_2_2 J206A J206B J208A J208B ...

Page 220: ...the main controller PCB sub RB A It is resolved by exposing the same data by 2 dot for the main scanning direction and by exposing the same data for A B and for C D of 4 beams for the sub scanning direction with the feeding speed remains Image equivalent of 1 line Image equivalent of 1 line BD APC control activation for laser B BD APC control activation for laser A Polygonmirrormotor Y M C K PTOP ...

Page 221: ...Chapter 8 8 8 F 8 7 1 1 pixel 1200DPI 600DPI Abeam Bbeam Cbeam Dbeam A1 A3 C1 C3 A1 A3 C1 C3 A1 A3 C1 C3 A1 A3 C1 C3 A1 A3 C1 C3 A2 A4 C2 C4 B1 B3 D1 D3 B2 B4 D2 D4 Laser Driver 1 Drum ...

Page 222: ... control IMG PWMIC A PWMIC B PWMIC C PWMIC D FIFO A B C D J210 J202 1 BD detection PCB Clock signals sync signals based on the BD signal are generated Video signals are generated in keeping with the sync signals BD detection signal DC controller PCB1 IMG Image signal for Beam C Image signal for Beam D Image signal for Beam A Image signal for Beam B 1 Y J202 M J203 C J204 Bk J205 ...

Page 223: ...gnal F 8 9 8 3 2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light 8 3 2 1 APC Control The machine uses the photodiode mounted on the laser driver PCB to monitor the intensify of laser light so as to ensure that it remains at a specific level PSTBY PSTBY PINTR LSTR PRINT Laser Y activation Laser M activation Laser C activation Laser Bk activation PTOP signal Y TOP signal M TOP signal C TOP signal Bk TOP si...

Page 224: ...question F 8 10 Pixels Lowest intensity Highest intensity ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 16 levels of intensity ...

Page 225: ...tion of the laser scanner motor so that the BD signal from individual laser units will be of the same phase as the reference signal if the BD signal is behind the reference signal accelerate if ahead decelerates F 8 11 J1607 J1611 J1615 J1619 DC controller PCB 1 IMG Control IC BD signal J211 Acceleration signal ACC Deceleration signal DEC Laser scanner motor rotation signal ...

Page 226: ...rol against process speed T 8 8 1 Adjust at paper interval 2 Speed change control is needed when switching the process speed If there is no switching speed controls is not performed Process speed after the speed change Process speed before the speed change 210 105 185 163 81 5 210 iRC5180 Constant Speed by X 105 Constant Speed by iRC5180 or Transparency mode by iRC4580 4080 X O O O 185 Bk Monochro...

Page 227: ... the operating voltage 5 V applied to the laser driver is turned off and in addition the laser control signal image signal is also turned off F 8 12 DC controller PCB 1 IMG PWMIC J118 J717 PS5 PS28 PS23 Image signal Front cover open closed sensor Manual feeder unit open closed sensor Fixing feeding unit open closed sensor Control signal Front cover switch Manual feeder unit open close switch Fixin...

Page 228: ...color by forming a pattern of a specific color on the transfer belt and reading it against the correct position F 8 13 Detecting displacement in color Displacement in sub scanning direction corrects the write start position in sub scanning direction Reads the individual pattern of different colors using the pattern reader photo sensors Identifies displacement in color with reference to the pattern...

Page 229: ...rned on after opening closing of the cover while the machine is in low power mode 10 hr after the machine has been left alone in standby state during quick correction auto gradation correction after sheet to sheet auto correction when 300 sheets small size equivalent in single sided have been fed continuously during last rotation auto correction at time of counter increments occurring after interm...

Page 230: ...olor displacement in sub scanning direction with reference to the timing at which other color patterns are checked after a check on the Y pattern If the timing is not correct the machine corrects the laser write start timing in sub scanning direction F 8 15 F 8 16 front rear For C For C For Bk For Bk Too early Correct position Displacement in sub scanning direction ...

Page 231: ... the Angle in Main Scanning Direction The Bk pattern is used as the reference The machine identifies the angle in main scanning direction with reference to front rear discrepancies of individual colors F 8 17 F 8 18 front rear Displacement Angle ...

Page 232: ...f the machine detects any angle it turns on the main scanning direction angle correction motor located inside the laser unit F 8 19 Main scanning direction angle correction lens Main scanning direction correction motor ...

Page 233: ...ion pattern front and the length of the center line of the image position correction pattern front of individual colors and identifies the difference between the two as the degree of color displacement in main scanning direction When the machine detects color displacement it corrects the timing at which the laser is started in main scanning direction F 8 20 F 8 21 Displacement in main scanning dir...

Page 234: ...line of the Bk image correction pattern rear and the center line of the individual image position correction patterns rear and identifies the difference between the two as the change in the reproduction ratio in main scanning direction When the machine detects any change it corrects the timing at which the video signals are transferred to the laser unit F 8 22 Bk C M Y rear ...

Page 235: ...e frequency of the image clock to change the reproduction ratio in main scanning direction Video signal for laser A Video signal for laser D Video signal for laser C Video signal for laser B Frequency control block Change in reproduction ratio in main scanning direction ...

Page 236: ...he Laser Unit 1 Remove the center delivery tray 2 2 screws 1 F 8 24 2 Remove the connectors 1 2 and the wire guide 3 F 8 25 8 4 1 2 Removing the Laser Unit 1 Remove the reader link unit cover 2 2 screws 1 F 8 26 2 Remove the positioning pin 2 from the reader link unit 1 stepped screw 1 F 8 27 1 2 3 ...

Page 237: ...inside cover 4 1 face cap 1 1 screw 2 F 8 28 When detaching the inside upper cover 2 push the top middle of the cover to free the hook 1 F 8 29 4 Shift the arm 1 of the reader link unit 90 deg to support the reader unit F 8 30 5 Remove the harness guide 2 8 connectors 1 F 8 31 2 1 ...

Page 238: ...n the upper surface of the new laser unit to the following Service Mode items Laser maker identification 1 COPIER ADJUST LASER LA MK Y M C K Laser magnification Y 2 COPIER ADJUST LASER LDADJ1 Y M C K 3 COPIER ADJUST LASER LDADJ2 Y M C K 4 COPIER ADJUST LASER LDADJ3 Y M C K Laser phase difference 5 COPIER ADJUST LASER LDADJ4 Y M C K 6 COPIER ADJUST LASER LDADJ4 Y M C K 7 COPIER ADJUST LASER LDADJ4 ...

Page 239: ...Chapter 9 IMAGE FORMATION ...

Page 240: ...1 Driving and Controlling the Image Formation System and the High Voltage System 9 16 9 5 Image Stabilization Control 9 18 9 5 1 Outline of Image Quality Control 9 18 9 5 2 Automated Image Stabilization Control 9 18 9 5 3 ATR Control 9 22 9 5 4 Discharge Current Level Control 9 23 9 5 5 ATVC Control transfer bias level correction 9 23 9 5 6 PASCAL Control image gradation 9 24 9 5 7 SALT Dmax Contr...

Page 241: ...rmediate Transfer Belt ITB 9 50 9 8 3 2 Secondary External Roller 9 51 9 8 3 3 Waste Toner Collection Mechanism 9 51 9 8 4 Separation Mechanism 9 52 9 8 4 1 Separation 9 52 9 9 Parts Replacement Procedure 9 54 9 9 1 Drum ITB Motor 9 55 9 9 2 Drum Drive Unit 9 56 9 9 3 Drive Roller 9 57 9 9 4 Developing Motor Bk Y M C 9 58 9 9 5 Secondary Transfer Unit 9 59 9 9 6 Intermediate Transfer Unit 9 60 9 9...

Page 242: ...2 Photosensitive drum Drum unit D UNIT Type of drum OPC Diameter of drum 30 6 mm Cleaning mechanism Cleaner less The residual toner after transfer is charged for collection by the developing assembly Process speed Plain Paper 1 CiRC5180 210mm sec CiRC4580 Color 163mm sec Black and White 185mm sec CiRC4080 Color 163mm sec Black and White 185mm sec Thick Paper 1 CiRC5180 105mm sec CiRC4580 81 5mm se...

Page 243: ...am Others Items of control by internal memory color of toner inside drum unit cumulative number of prints cumulative number of video counts data on life of drum unit data on toner supply control Toner container Detection of toner level in reference to number of rotations made by toner feedscrew Toner volume iRC5180 Y 550g M 550g C 550g Bk 550g iRC4580 Y 490g M 470g C 470g Bk 530g iRC4080 Y 490g M ...

Page 244: ...echanism cleaning blade Image stabili zation mecha nism Descharge current level control to prevent image faults caused by changes in environment ATVC control to ensure good transfer ATR control to correct toner density about PASCAL control to correct image gradation characteristics SALT Dmax control to correct development density maximum density characteristics SALT Dhalf control to correct develo...

Page 245: ...1 Auxiliary brushes Primary charging roller Developing cylinder Intermediate transfer belt Developing assembly Toner container Bk Photosensitive drum Primary transfer rollers Secondary transfer internal roller D UNIT Y D UNIT M D UNIT C D UNIT Bk Intermediate transfer unit ...

Page 246: ...am Upstream auxiliary brush AC component rating specifications range 200 Vp p Upstream auxiliary brush DC component rating specifications range 200 to 300 V standard 250 V Downstream brush DC component rating specifications range 700 to 850 V standard 750 V Voltage correction factor environment sensor Developing bias AC component standard value 1800 Vp p fixed DC component rating specifications ra...

Page 247: ... mode Full color or monochrome mode Secondary transfer 750V 0V 300V 0V 1800Vp p 450V 0V 1500Vp p 250V 0V 200Vp p 400V 0V 0V 2000V Downstream auxiliary brush Primary charging roller Upstream auxiliary brush Primary transfer roller Secondary transfer external roller Developing cylinder Full color Plain paper Normal temperature humidify ...

Page 248: ...e Transfer block 4 5 6 moves the toner image to the ITB or paper Intermediate transfer belt ITB cleaning block 7 collects residual toner from the ITB Photosensitive drum cleaning block 8 9 10 collects residual toner from the photosensitive drum Y M C Bk 2 Laser beam exposure 1 Primary Charging 9 Charging roller cleaning 8 Auxiliary charging 10 Toner collection 3 Development Photosensitive drum Del...

Page 249: ...n against the cleaning sheet 4 Charging to a negative potential by the downstream auxiliary brush 3 Charging to a positive potential by the upstream auxiliary brush Transfer residual toner 3 Development block Primary transfer block Photosensitive drum cleaning block 1 1 reducing negative charges on toner removal of charges 2 evening out charge to a specific level 3 toner left behind from secondary...

Page 250: ...container Transfer residual toner Primary transfer block Secondary transfer block Paper Y M C Bk 3 Scraping off the toner by the cleaning blade 2 Moving the toner image from the ITB to paper 1 Moving the toner from the photosensitive drum to the ITB Toner left behind from secondary transfer ...

Page 251: ... F 9 6 iRC5180 iRC4580 iRC4080 100V 240sec 300sec 300sec 120V 240sec 270sec 270sec 230V 240sec 240sec 240sec 1 iR C5180 iR C4580 2880 230V 0sec 2 3 Main power switch ON WMUPR CNTR Approx 27 to 120sec Approx 10sec Approx 80sec 1 2 PSTBY Start up sequence of the drum unit Y with surface temperature of fixing roller Less than 100 Drum ITB motor M1 Exposure Y Charging DC bias Y Development motor Y Dev...

Page 252: ...the surface temperature of the fixing roller is less than 100 C after jam recovery the machine uses the sequence it uses at power on 1 F 9 7 Image stabilization control for details see appropriate sections 1 iR C5180 iR C4580 2880 230V 0sec 2 WMUPR CNTR 1 PSTBY Start up sequence of the drum unit Y with surface temperature of fixing roller at 100 C or more Main power switch ON Approx 30sec Approx 1...

Page 253: ...onochrome copies prints Exposure is not executed for colors other than those in question When Making Bk Monochrome Copies Prints When making Bk monochrome copies prints no high voltage is applied for Y or M and the developing motors for these colors are not driven PSTBY PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR 1 Drum ITB motor M1 Exposure Y Charging DC bias Y Development motor Y Developing DC bias Y Developing AC b...

Page 254: ...itions cumulative output number of pages is 100 or more cumulative output number of pages is 100 or more from Image position correction ÅEcumulative output number of pages is 100 or more from SALT Dmax control 1 PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY Drum ITB motor M1 Exposure Y Charging DC bias Y Development motor Y Developing DC bias Y Developing AC bias Y Upstream auxiliary DC bias Y Upstream auxiliary A...

Page 255: ...it has been fitted image stabilization control is executed in the following order discharge current level control ATVC control ATR control SALT Dmax control image position correctionSALT Dhalf control F 9 10 CNTR WMUPR PSTBY 1 1 iR C5180 iR C4580 2880 230V 0sec 2 iR C5180 Drum ITB motor M1 Exposure Y Charging DC bias Y Development motor Y Developing DC bias Y Developing AC bias Y Upstream auxiliar...

Page 256: ... over from full color mode to monochrome mode requires a sequence in which the high voltage of YMC must be lowered By reducing the use of such a sequence the machine avoids an appreciable drop in productivity color original full color mode sequence monochrome original for 4rd and subsequent copies prints after color page full color mode sequence for 5th and subsequent copies prints after color pag...

Page 257: ... image formation system is driven by the toner container motor developing motor and drum ITB motor through gears For details see the appropriate sections F 9 11 M20 M21 M22 M23 M12 M13 M14 M15 M1 J706 J710 J118B ITB Drum ITB motor Drum ITB motor drive signal Developing motor Toner drive motor DC controller PCB Toner container motor drive signal Developing motor drive signal ...

Page 258: ...stem For details see the appropriate sections F 9 12 HV1 1 each for YMCBk HV2 HV3 HV4 1 for YM 1 for CBk High voltage unit Secondary transfer high voltage unit Downstream auxiliary brush Upstream auxiliary brush Primary charging roller Photosensitive drum Secondary transfer external roller Y M C Bk Developing cylinder HV high voltage PCB ...

Page 259: ... good transfer correction of transfer bias level PASCAL Control SALT Control to suit changes in image density and gradation correction of charging developing transfer bias correction of image correction table Operation discharge current control ATVC control ATR control SALT Dmax control image position correction SALT Dhalf control time required sec power introduction jam recovery When the fixing r...

Page 260: ...tput of 200 to under 400 sheets initial rotation 3 Yes Yes ca 15 4C counter 12 every 200 sheets of cumulated output interval 3 Bk counter 12 every 400 sheets of cumulated output interval 3 12 13 Yes Yes Yes Yes 400 sheets 9 ca 30 50 500 sheets of cumulated output 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes ca 45 70 at detection of significant environmental change after being left for 10 hours in STBY mode 3 Yes Yes Yes...

Page 261: ...ings shown below F 9 13 12 In 4C counter the count is increased by color copy print In Bk counter the counter is increased by mono copy print Image stabilization control is carried out when either of the 4C or the Bk counter reaches the specified value When the image stabilization control is carried out the counter that reached the specified value is cleared Also if the 4C counter is higher than 8...

Page 262: ...river screen Control Panel F 9 14 Driver Screen F 9 15 13 When the image stabilization control is carried out as the Bk counter s count reached the specified value image position correction is not carried out 100 1 A3 2 Send Black Black Auto Color Select Full Color Single Color Two Colors Paper Select Finishing Interrupt Printer is warming up Special Features Text Photo Map A System Monitor 2 Side...

Page 263: ... COPIER OPTION BODY INTROT T Use it to change the intervals of execution sessions for image stabilization control for standby Default at shipment upon RAM initialization 10 COPIER OPTION BODY ADJ LVL Use it to change the execution mode settings for image stabilization control for a specific number of pages Default at shipment upon RAM initialization 0 9 5 3 ATR Control The machine executes ATR con...

Page 264: ...l correction The ATVC control mechanism is used to determine the optimum level of transfer voltage for transfer of images from the photosensitive drum to the ITB and from the ITB to paper The level of transfer voltage is corrected in relation to changes in temperature humidity deterioration of rollers and types of paper Description of Control 1 A reference voltage is applied to the transfer roller...

Page 265: ...t set in the reader V Prepares the image correction table A data processing V End Timing of Control Service Person Interaction The mechanism is executed when full correction is executed while auto gradation correction is under way in user mode MEMO Differences Among 3 Test Patterns Test Print 1 It shows 64 gradations expressed by means of error diffusion processing which is not subject to moire an...

Page 266: ...scription of Control Start up V Measures the light reflected by the surface of the ITB background measurement V Forms a sample patch of the maximum solid density stored in the DC controller V Uses the SALT sensor to take the reading V Converts density performs computation using the measurement taken V Determines the charging DC bias developing DC bias and primary charging current level V End Timin...

Page 267: ...d in service mode it is activated when auto control is executed The time it takes is about double the time taken when plain paper is used Description of Control Start up V Measures the light reflected by the surface of the ITB background measurement V Forms a sample patch of a gradation pattern stored in the main controller on the ITB V Uses the SALT sensor to take a reading V Performs density con...

Page 268: ...dation characteristics based on the 64 gradation density data collected from the scanner Quick Correction The machine knows the actual gradation characteristics based on the 9 gradation density data Full correction Quick correction Description Start up Start up v v SALT Dmax control determinesdevelopingDC charging DC primary current levels SALT Dmax control determinesdeveloping DC charging DC and ...

Page 269: ...able C v v End End Image correction table for use at time of image formation Image correction table A Table prepared by the result of including the contents of the table A to the result of compari son between image correction tables B and C Characteristics A test print must be printed and read by the machine The machine does not use print a test print Full correction Quick correction ...

Page 270: ...ary charging roller i is detected by the HV1 PCB and voltage is calculated by I V conversion of the current value By rectifying this voltage using the HV1 SUB PCB and by A D conversion using the DC controller PCB the detected voltage V is calculated The detected voltage V and the specified voltage v are compared to detect the presence absence of the drum unit In the case the drum unit is present D...

Page 271: ...riven via the gear auxiliary brush cleaning sheet drum ITB motor M1 reciprocate in the direction of the drum shaft CPU A D conversion DC controller PCB2 MAICY HV1 SUB PCB I V conversion HV1 PCB detected voltage V current i rectification circuit primary charging roller Drum unit Drum M M drum ITB motor DC primary charging roller developing cylinder auxiliary brush photosensitive drum toner stirring...

Page 272: ...the photosensitive drum collects toner from the photosensitive drum coming from upstream Developing blade serves to coat the developing cylinder with a uniform layer of developerserves to coat the developing cylinder with a uniform layer of developer Toner stirring screw stirs the toner and the developer inside the developing assembly thus charging the toner to a negative potential ATR sensor dete...

Page 273: ... SALT sensor changes the median voltage of the AC bias to adjust the image density a 1 Route of the Developing Bias F 9 26 a 2 Route of the Developing Cylinder Control Signal High voltage unit HV1 Y J70 J71 J72 HV1 M J70 J71 J72 HV1 C J70 J71 J72 HV1 Bk J70 J71 J72 J76 HV2 J81 J82 HV1 SUB HV2 SUB J87 J91 J86 J85 J75 J77 J73 J79 AC DC bias for developing cylinder DC power supply unit 1kV 24V ...

Page 274: ...109 J131 B High voltage unit J75 J77 J73 J79 DEV_AC_CLK1_Y DEV_AC_CLK2_Y _M _M _C _C _K _K DEV_DC_CTRL_K DEV_VIN _C DEV_VIN _M DEV_VIN _Y DEV_VIN DEV_CLK A DEV_CLK B DEV_CLK C DEV_CLK A DEV_CLK B DEV_CLK C DEV_AC_CTRLT_Y M DEV_DC_CTRL_Y M DEV_MODE_Y M DEV_AC_CTRLT_C K DEV_DC_CTRL_C K DEV_MODE_C K Environment sensor SALT sensor control signal ...

Page 275: ... Component Upstream auxiliary brush removes charge from the photosensitive drum in preparation for the next image formation session the latent static image from the previous session is removed charges the residual toner to a positive potential to increase the effects of charging by the downstream brush as part of the upcoming operation Downstream auxiliary brush charges the photosensitive drum to ...

Page 276: ... the environment sensor upstream auxiliary brush DC Component level of output suited to the reading of the environment sensor upstream downstream auxiliary brush High voltage unit HV1 Y J70 J71 HV1 M J70 J71 HV1 C J70 J71 HV1 Bk J70 J71 J76 J74 J78 HV4 C Bk J84CK J94 HV4 Y M J84YM J94 HV2 J84 J82 HV1 SUB HV2 SUB J87 J91 J86 J92 DC bias for upstream auxiliary brush DC bias for upstream auxiliary br...

Page 277: ...1 HV1 Bk J70 J71 HV1 SUB J97 J98 J74 J78 DC controller PCB J115 A J115 B High voltage unit HV4 Y M J93 J73YM Environment sensor SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_K C SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_K C SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_Y M SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_Y M SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_K C SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_K C SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_Y M SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_Y M HV4 C Bk J93 J73CK control signal ...

Page 278: ...iliary Brush Bias Control Signal DC bias for downstream auxiliary brush 1kV 24V High voltage unit HV1 Y J70 J71 J72 HV1 M J70 J71 J72 HV1 C J70 J71 J72 HV1 Bk J70 J71 J72 J76 HV2 J81 J82 HV1 SUB HV2 SUB J87 J91 J86 J85 J75 J77 J73 J79 DC power supply unit ...

Page 279: ...1 Y J70 J72 HV1 M J70 J72 HV1 C J70 J72 HV1 Bk J70 J72 HV1 SUB J73 J75 J77 J79 J97 J98 DC controller PCB J115 A J115 B High voltage unit SUB_LO_CTRL_Y SUB_LO_CTRL_M SUB_LO_CTRL_C SUB_LO_CTRL_K SUB_LO_DC_CTRL_C K SUB_LO_DC_CTRL_Y M control signal ...

Page 280: ...or a cleaning mechanism for the photosensitive drum Component Primary charging roller 1 in preparation for the next image formation session the photosensitive drum is evenly charged to a negative potential 2 returns the toner changed to a negative potential to the photosensitive drum for collection in the developing assembly Primary charging roller cleaning sheet charges residual toner to a negati...

Page 281: ...uited to discharge current control DC Component level of output suited to the reading of the environment sensor SALT sensor High voltage unit HV1 Y J70 J71 J72 HV1 M J70 J71 J72 HV1 C J70 J71 J72 HV1 Bk J70 J71 J72 J76 HV2 J81 J82 HV1 SUB HV2 SUB J87 J91 J86 J85 J75 J77 J73 J79 DC power supply unit AC DC bias for charging roller 1kV 24V ...

Page 282: ...V2 SUB J87 J88 DC controller PCB J114 High voltage unit J75 J77 J73 J79 CHRG_AC_CLK CH_CLK CHRG_AC _CLK CHRG_AC _CLK CHRG_AC _CLK CHRG_AC _CLK CHRG_AC_CTRL _Y M CHRG_AC_CTRL _C K CHRG_DC_CTRL _Y M CHRG_DC_CTRL _C K CHRG_DC_CTRL _Y CHRG_AC_CTRL _Y_SND _M _M_SND _C _C_SND _K _K_SND Environment sensor SALT sensor J98 J97 J115 A J115 B control signal ...

Page 283: ... the same construction F 9 36 9 7 2 Toner Receptacle Presence Absence Detection Toner Receptacle Presence Absence Detection There is no software mechanism to detect the toner receptacle presence absence When there is no toner receptacle releasing lever cannot be locked and therefore the machine cannot be started Stirring blade Toner feedscrew supplies toner from the container to the developing ass...

Page 284: ...rt Source of drive Remarks Stirring blade Toner container motor M20 to 23 driven through gars Toner feedscrew Toner container motor M20 to 23 driven through gears M20 M21 M22 M23 Toner stirring blade Toner container motor drive signal Toner feedscrew DC controller PCB Y M C Bk ...

Page 285: ...n carrier magnetic and toner non magnetic changes the force of magnetism detects changes to identify the level of toner SALT Sensor photo sensor Description checks the sample toner formed on the intermediate transfer belt ITB at such times as programmed checks the density of the toner image after development DC controller PCB SALT sensor ATR sensor Y M C Bk Feedscrew rotation sensor J126 J125 J129...

Page 286: ...t The toner supply level is determined by detecting the revolution of the toner supply screw using the toner supply screw revolution sensor inside the toner receptacle Toner supply level to the developing assembly per 1 revolution of the screw is constant Therefore the toner level is calculated by cumulated revolution number F 9 39 Developing assembly Toner container Y DC controller PCB J124 J126 ...

Page 287: ...imary transfer roller 1 pc each for Y M C and Bk ITB cleaning blade secondary transfer internal roller Secondary Transfer Unit secondary transfer external roller static eliminator feed guide F 9 40 ITB cleaning blade ITB Primary transfer roller Secondary transfer internal roller Secondary transfer external roller Waste toner feedscrew Feed guide Attraction plate Static eliminator Transfer lower fr...

Page 288: ...r inside roller follows the ITB secondary transfer outside roller secondary transfer inside roller driven via the gear tension roller follows the ITB waste toner feeding screw tension roller driven via the gear ITB primary transfer roller drive roller secondary transfer inside roller secondary transfer outside roller waste toner feeding screw tension roller drum ITB motor M1 DC controller PCB 1 J1...

Page 289: ...ansfer bias output according to the paper type environmental sensor color mode full mono and ATVC control e Primary transfer bias bias control signal flow path F 9 42 HV2 J83 J80 DC controller PCB 1 J114 DC power supply unit high voltage unit HV2 SUB J89 J88 J91 primary transfer roller environmental sensor 1_TR_CTRL_Y M C K TR1_CTRL_Y M C K 1kV 24V control signal DC bias for primary transfer ...

Page 290: ... DC bias for secondary transfer HV3 T801 J95 DC controller PCB 1 J114 DC power supply unit HV2 SUB J90 J88 J91 environmental sensor secondary transfer outside roller high voltage unit secondary transfer high voltage unit TR2_CTRL_P N TR2_SEL NCTL PCTL PSEN 1kV 24V control signal ...

Page 291: ... uses a cleaning blade to clean the intermediate transfer belt ITB T 9 34 F 9 44 Cleaning belt remains in contact with the ITB at all times and used to scrape off toner from the ITB Scoop up sheet used to prevent fall of toner Cleaning blade Scoop up sheet Waste toner feedscrew ITB ...

Page 292: ...l 1 when a copy print job ends 2 after recovery from a jam 3 when a sample image or test pattern is formed as part of image stabilization control 9 8 3 3 Waste Toner Collection Mechanism Waste toner is collected by the following mechanisms waste toner scraped by the cleaning blade and fed to the waste toner box by the waste toner feeding screw waste toner box full detection detected by the waste t...

Page 293: ...wer the potential occurring on the back of paper thus facilitating the separation of paper from the ITB 2 Separate Auxiliary Mechanism Feed Guide It is used to prevent increases in the potential occurring on the back of paper because of friction used when it is moved to the fixing assembly It is used to prevent image faults caused by contact with the attraction plate Attraction Plate It is grounde...

Page 294: ... Feed guide ITB Paper The eccentric arrangement of the 2 rollers causes the paper to separate by taking advantage of the rigidity of paper curvature separation Static eliminator Secondary transfer external roller Feed guide Attraction plate ...

Page 295: ... 12 32 Reference Removing the DC Controller Box1 7 Remove the IH power supply unit page 12 29 Reference Removing the IH Power Supply Unit 8 Remove the lattice connector mount 4 2 clamps 1 1 screw 2 6 connectors 1 F 9 47 9 Remove the high voltage unit 2 page 12 28 Reference Removing the High Voltage Unit 2 Points to Note When Removing the Drum ITB Motor Mounting To remove put your hand into the ins...

Page 296: ...r 6 Remove the left rear cover upper page 12 23 Reference Removing the Rear Left Cover Upper 7 Remove the main controller cover page 5 23 Reference Removing the Main Controller Box 8 Remove the DC controller box 2 page 12 31 Reference Removing the DC Controller Box2 9 Remove the DC controller box 1 page 12 32 Reference Removing the DC Controller Box1 10 Remove the IH power supply unit page 12 29 R...

Page 297: ...from the machine s rear side plate The drum drive unit is hooked on the protrusion from the rear side plate lift it slightly to remove F 9 53 15 Remove the drum ITB motor base 3 2 connectors 1 3 screws 2 F 9 54 16 Remove the developing drive unit 4 6 wire saddles 1 1 connector 2 7 screws 3 F 9 55 9 9 2 2 Removing the Drum Drive Unit 1 Remove the drum drive unit 3 6 connectors 1 7 screws 2 F 9 56 2...

Page 298: ...can cause the spring to snap out Be sure to start at the rear When removing the gear be sure to take care not to lose the parallel pin At the rear remove the following E ring 1 washer 2 bearing 3 E ring 4 gear 5 parallel pin 6 gear butting spacer 7 bearing 8 and 2 E rings 9 1 At the rear remove the following E ring 1 washer 2 bearing 3 E ring 4 gear 5 parallel pin 6 gear butting spacer 7 bearing 8...

Page 299: ...move the left rear cover upper page 12 21 Reference Removing the Left Rear Cover Upper 5 Remove the main controller box page 5 23 Reference Removing the Main Controller Box 6 Remove the DC controller box 2 page 12 31 Reference Removing the DC Controller Box2 7 Remove the DC controller box 1 page 12 32 Reference Removing the DC Controller Box1 8 Remove the high voltage unit 1 page 12 27 Reference R...

Page 300: ...32 Reference Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 1 2 Remove the fixing unit 2 Remove the fixing feeder unit page 10 63 Reference Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 3 Lift the duplexing open close guide 3 in the direction of A and shift it in the direction of B Then remove it 1 connector 2 Open sheet 1 F 9 64 9 9 5 2 Removing the Secondary Transfer Unit 1 Remove the secondary transfer unit retainer 2 1 scr...

Page 301: ...t the secondary transfer unit 1 F 9 67 9 9 6 Intermediate Transfer Unit 9 9 6 1 Preparation for Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit 1 Slide out the manual feed unit 9 9 6 2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit 1 Pressure release of the intermediate transfer unit 1 1 Open the front cover and turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever 1 to unlock it F 9 68 1 2 Remove the middle right...

Page 302: ...ever will fall down which may cause a flaw on ITB F 9 70 When removing the intermediate transfer unit be careful to keep the upper side from contact with the main unit F 9 71 2 While picking the tabs at the front and the rear slide out the intermediate transfer unit 1 then remove it by holding it by the indicated area 2 F 9 72 F 9 73 ...

Page 303: ... 1 F 9 74 2 Remove the waste toner container 1 F 9 75 9 9 7 2 Removing the Transfer Cleaning Unit 1 Remove the transfer cleaning unit 2 1 screw 1 F 9 76 9 9 8 Intermediate Transfer Belt 9 9 8 1 Preparation for Removing the Intermediate Transfer Belt 1 Slide out the manual feed unit 2 Removing the intermediate transfer unit page 9 60 Reference Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit ...

Page 304: ... be careful not to make flaws on the intermediate transfer belt F 9 77 2 Remove the varistor 2 screw 1 F 9 78 3 Remove the transfer guide plate 2 screw 1 When removing the transfer guide plate 2 be careful not to make flaws on the intermediate transfer belt F 9 79 4 Pull out the link plate rear 2 4 screws 1 at the rear F 9 80 1 2 ...

Page 305: ...over so that the unit is upright F 9 82 6 Be sure that the rear link plate 1 is on the opposite of the middle right cover so that the intermediate transfer unit will not fall down F 9 83 7 Remove the 4 screws at the rear 1 and pull out the link plate front 2 then rotate it 180 deg F 9 84 Be sure to fix the connecting plate front with screws while pressing the transfer frame in the direction shown ...

Page 306: ...that there is no dirt on the secondary transfer internal roller When it is dirty clean it with alcohol Cautions in attaching the intermediate transfer belt 1 Attach it so that the red mark on the intermediate transfer belt rib is placed in the rear side F 9 88 2 When attaching the belt place the unit at a low level so that the belt can be inserted straight from the upper level F 9 89 3 Be careful ...

Page 307: ...Remove the intermediate transfer belt tension roller 6 3 E rings 1 2 washers 2 1 gear 3 2 bearings 4 2 screws 5 F 9 91 9 9 10 Primary Transfer Roller 9 9 10 1 Preparation for Removing the Primary Transfer Roller 1 Slide out the manual feed unit 2 Removing the intermediate transfer unit page 9 60 Reference Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit 3 Remove the intermediate transfer belt page 9 63 Ref...

Page 308: ...at the edge of the sheet 1 is on the inner side of the rib 2 F 9 94 9 9 11 Secondary Transfer External Roller 9 9 11 1 Preparation for Removing the Secondary Transfer External Roller 1 Remove the fixing unit 1 1 Remove the fixing drive unit page 11 32 Reference Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 1 2 Remove the fixing unit 2 Remove the fixing feeder unit page 10 63 Reference Removing the Fixing Feeder ...

Page 309: ...econdary transfer roller 1 becomes soiled with toner or the like the roller can fail to rotate causing lines Be sure to check that the spacer moves F 9 96 2 When attaching the roller 1 be sure that the edge of the leaf spring 2 found at the rear and used for electrical continuity is not bent over F 9 97 3 Be sure that the spring 1 is securely fitted to the back of the tab used to remove attach the...

Page 310: ...er Belt 9 9 12 2 Removing the Secondary Transfer Internal Roller 1 Extend the belt frame and fit the link plate at both front and rear 2 Remove the positioning block 2 at the rear 2 screws 1 F 9 99 3 Remove the E ring 1 gear 2 and bushing 3 F 9 100 4 Remove the secondary transfer internal roller 3 1 E ring 1 1 bushing 2 at the front F 9 101 Points to Note When Attacing the Secondary Transfer Inter...

Page 311: ...e Removing the Rear Lower Cover 5 Remove the rear left cover upper page 12 23 Reference Removing the Rear Left Cover Upper 6 Remove the left rear cover upper page 12 21 Reference Removing the Left Rear Cover Upper 7 Remove the main controller box page 5 23 Reference Removing the Main Controller Box 8 Remove the DC controller box 2 page 12 31 Reference Removing the DC Controller Box2 9 Remove the D...

Page 312: ...1 Preparation for Removing the Waste Toner Detection PCB 1 Remove the waste toner container 1 1 Open the front cover and turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever 1 F 9 107 1 2 Remove the waste toner container 2 F 9 108 2 Remove the front cover page 12 20 Reference Removing the Front Cover 3 Remove the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever 2 1 screw 1 F 9 109 2 1 3 ...

Page 313: ...ower 3 1 connector 1 5 screws 2 F 9 111 9 9 14 2 Removing the Waste Toner Detection PCB 1 Remove the waste toner detection PCB cover 2 2 screws 1 found behind the fixing feeder unit F 9 112 2 Remove the waste toner detection PCB 1 from the cover and remove the connector 2 for replacement F 9 113 ...

Page 314: ...ear cover upper page 12 21 Reference Removing the Left Rear Cover Upper 7 Remove the main controller box page 5 23 Reference Removing the Main Controller Box 8 Remove the DC controller box 2 page 12 31 Reference Removing the DC Controller Box2 9 Remove the DC controller box 1 page 12 32 Reference Removing the DC Controller Box1 10 Remove the high voltage unit 1 page 12 27 Reference Removing the Hi...

Page 315: ... Attaching the Toner Container Drive Assembly Upper Plate When attaching the top plate check to attach the edge of the idler gear 1 after matching it against the hole 2 in the top plate and the hole 3 in the bottom plate F 9 118 F 9 119 F 9 120 ...

Page 316: ...r Cover 4 Remove the rear lower cover page 12 23 Reference Removing the Rear Lower Cover 5 Remove the rear left cover upper page 12 23 Reference Removing the Rear Left Cover Upper 6 Remove the left rear cover upper page 12 21 Reference Removing the Left Rear Cover Upper 7 Remove the main controller box page 5 23 Reference Removing the Main Controller Box 8 Remove the DC controller box 2 page 12 31...

Page 317: ...1 2 E rings 2 2 bushings 3 harness from the edge saddle 4 harness 5 of the toner container motor from the cord clamp 6 F 9 125 Points to Note When Attaching the Toner Container Drive Assembly Upper Plate When attaching the top plate check to attach the edge of the idler gear 1 after matching it against the hole 2 in the top plate and the hole 3 in the bottom plate F 9 126 F 9 127 3 2 1 ...

Page 318: ...tip of the toner container motor F 9 129 2 Remove the toner container motor 3 2 screws 1 connector 2 F 9 130 9 9 17 Waste Toner Feedscrew Case 9 9 17 1 Preparation for Removing the Waste Toner Feedscrew Case 1 Remove the waste toner container 1 1 Open the front cover and turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever 1 F 9 131 ...

Page 319: ...ints to Note When Removing the Waste Toner Feedscrew Case Remove the waste toner feedscrew only when a jam has occurred and the sheet 1 attached to the feedscrew has become damaged or bent rendered useless F 9 134 1 Turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever 1 slightly counterclockwise and remove the screw 2 then remove the waste toner feedscrew case 3 F 9 135 ...

Page 320: ... Upper Right Cover 9 9 18 2 Removing the Pattern Reader Unit 1 Remove the pattern reader unit 5 2 connectors 1 1 screw 2 1 plate 4 from the hook of the upper right stay 3 F 9 136 Point to Note When Attaching the Pattern Reader Unit Attaching to the Machine 1 Match the boss 1 with the rail 2 F 9 137 2 While pushing the cleaning member 1 to the right fit it in while taking care so that it will not h...

Page 321: ...he intermediate transfer unit page 9 60 Reference Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit 3 Remove the upper right cover page 12 20 Reference Removing the Upper Right Cover 4 Remove the pattern reader unit page 9 79 Reference Removing the Pattern Reader Unit 9 9 19 2 Removing the Auto Registration Sensor PCB 1 Remove the plate found to the rear of the pattern reader unit 2 3 screws 1 F 9 140 2 Rem...

Page 322: ...out the manual feed unit 2 Removing the intermediate transfer unit page 9 60 Reference Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit 3 Remove the upper right cover page 12 20 Reference Removing the Upper Right Cover 4 Remove the pattern reader unit page 9 79 Reference Removing the Pattern Reader Unit 9 9 20 2 Removing the SALT Sensor 1 Remove the plate from the rear of the pattern reader unit 2 3 screws...

Page 323: ...Chapter 9 9 82 Points to Note When Attaching the Plate When Attaching the plate 1 be sure to position it so that it is farther on the inner side than the cleaning member 2 F 9 145 ...

Page 324: ...Chapter 10 PICKUP FEEDING SYSTEM ...

Page 325: ...tte Pickup Assembly 10 9 10 3 2 Stationary Jams 10 10 10 3 2 1 Stationary Jams 10 10 10 3 2 2 Stationary Jams at Power On 10 11 10 4 Cassette 10 12 10 4 1 Identifying the Paper Size 10 12 10 4 2 Detecting the Level of Paper 10 14 10 5 Cassette Pick Up Unit 10 16 10 5 1 Outline 10 16 10 5 2 Basci Sequence of Operations 10 17 10 6 Manual Feed Pickup Unit 10 18 10 6 1 Outline 10 18 10 6 2 Basic Seque...

Page 326: ... Resistor 10 50 10 10 14 Cassette Pickup Solenoid 10 51 10 10 15 Manual Feed Tray Unit 10 52 10 10 16 Manual Feed Unit 10 52 10 10 17 Manual Feed Roller 10 53 10 10 18 Manual Feed Separation Roller 10 54 10 10 19 Manual Feed Last Paper Sensor 10 56 10 10 20 Manual Feed Sensor 10 57 10 10 21 Transparency Sensor Front Rear 10 58 10 10 22 Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid 10 58 10 10 23 Registration Motor ...

Page 327: ...0 10 47 Face Down Delivery Roller 1 10 95 10 10 48 Face Up Delivery Roller 10 98 10 10 49 Delivery Vertical Path Roller 1 10 100 10 10 50 Delivery Vertical Path Roller 2 10 101 10 10 51 Face Down Delivery Motor 10 102 10 10 52 Delivery Vertical Path Motor 10 102 10 10 53 Face Down Delivery Sensor 1 10 103 10 10 54 Center Delivery Tray Full sensor 10 104 10 10 55 Face Down Delivery Sensor 2 10 105 ...

Page 328: ...r feed reference Center Size of paper accommodation Cassette 1 2 550 sheets 80 g m2 Manual feed tray 100 sheets 80 g m2 Size of paper Cassette 1 2 A3 A4 A4R B4 B5 B5R A5R 12x18 11x17 LGL LTR LTRR STMTR Manual feed tray 98 to 320 mm main scanning direction 148 to 457 2 mm sub scanning direction Type of paper Plain Heavy transparency 64 g m2 to 209 g m2 from cassette 64 g m2 to 253 g m2 from manual ...

Page 329: ...10 1 2 Arrangement of the Units F 10 1 T 10 2 1 Delivery assembly 5 Pickup unit 2 Fixing unit 6 Registration unit 3 Duplex unit 7 Manual feed unit 4 Secondary transfer unit 8 Intermediate transfer unit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 330: ... roller 5 Face up delivery roller 17 Re pickup roller 6 Internal delivery roller 18 Manual feed separation roller 7 Fixing roller fixing upper roller 19 Manual feed roller 8 Pressure roller fixing lower roller 20 Pre registration roller 9 Duplex roller 1 21 Lower registration roller 10 Duplex roller 2 22 Upper registration roller 11 Duplex roller 3 23 secondary transfer outside roller 12 Duplex ro...

Page 331: ...F 10 3 Face down delivery copy tray Face down delivery center delivery tray Face up delivery side delivery tray Pickup from cassette 2 Pickup from cassette 3 Pickup from cassette 4 Pickup from manual feeder Pickup from paper deck Pickup from cassette 1 ...

Page 332: ...sette 1 retry paper sensor PS16 7 Fixing delivery sensor PS25 21 Pickup vertical path cover open closed sensor PS11 8 fixing wrap sensor ÅiPS29Åj 22 Manual feed last paper sensor PS9 9 Fixing inlet sensor PS27 23 Manual fed unit open closed sensor PS28 10 Duplex registration sensor PS21 24 Manual feed paper sensor PS10 11 Duplex horizontal registration sensor PS22 25 Front cover open closed sensor...

Page 333: ... 1 Delivery path switching solenoid 1 SL2 5 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid SL3 2 Delivery path switching solenoid 2 SL5 6 Duplex pickup solenoid CL2 3 Duplex registration clutch CL1 7 manual feed pickup solenoid SL1 4 Cassette 2 pickup solenoid SL4 CL CL SL SL SL SL SL 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 ...

Page 334: ...clutch M11 face down delivery motor M1 drum ITB motor M24 fixing motor M6 cassette 1 pickup motor M26 duplex feeder motor M7 caste 2 pickup motor SL1 manual feed pickup solenoid M8 registration motor SL3 caste 1 pickup solenoid M9 pre registration motor SL4 cassette 2 pickup solenoid M7 SL3 SL4 M11 M10 M24 M26 CL1 CL2 M1 M8 M9 SL1 M6 ...

Page 335: ...power switch ON WMUPR WMUP PSTBY Drum ITB motor M1 Cassette 1 pickup motor M6 Cassette 2 pickup motor M7 Registration motor M8 Pre registration motor M9 Delivery vertical path motor M10 Face down delivery motor M11 Duplex feeder motor M26 Fixing motor M24 360 sec approx Printer unit Print start 2 76sec approx 1 3sec approx PRINT LSTR Cassette 1 pickup motor M6 Cassette pickup solenoid SL3 Cassette...

Page 336: ... paper is moved form the sensor N 1 to the delay jam sensor N in question is controlled and a delay jam will be identified if the delay jam sensor N in question does not go ON within a specific period of time after the sensor N 1 has gone ON F 10 10 Source Motor Sensor Cassette 1 Pickup motor M6 Cassette 1 retry paper sensor PS16 Cassette 2 Pickup motor M7 Cassette 2 retry paper sensor PS17 Jam ch...

Page 337: ...wn delivery sensor 2 PS6 Duplex registration sensor PS21 Duplex pickup sensor PS24 Sensor Cassette 1 retry paper sensor PS16 Caste 2 retry paper sensor PS17 Registration sensor PS26 Fixing delivery sensor PS25 Fixing inlet sensor PS27 Face down delivery sensor 1 PS12 Face down deliver y sensor 2 PS6 Duplex registration sensor PS21 Duplex pickup sensor PS24 Fixing wrap sensor ÅiPS29Åj Jam check Sen...

Page 338: ...otations at power on T 10 10 Sensor Caste 1 retry paper sensor PS16 Cassette 2 retry paper sensor PS17 Registration sensor PS26 Fixing delivery sensor PS25 Face down delivery sensor 1 PS12 Face down delivery sensor 2 PS6 Duplex registration sensor PS21 Duplex pickup sensor PS24 Fixing inlet sensor PS27 Fixing wrap sensor ÅiPS29Åj Fixing arch sensorÅiPS47Åj ...

Page 339: ...The 4 in a row actuator designed for the identification of the cassette size found on the machine side goes ON OFF according to the position of the slide guide permitting the machine to identify 15 settings In the absence of a cassette all 4 actuators will go OFF F 10 12 Paper size slide guide Cassette Size detecting actuator Cassette open Cassette closed Cassette size detecting switch ...

Page 340: ... 2 LTR ON 3 LTR R ON ON 4 LGL ON ON 5 11X17 1 ON 6 A5 R ON ON 7 A4 ON ON 8 A4 R ON ON 9 A3 ON ON ON 10 B5 ON ON ON 11 B5 R ON ON ON 12 B4 ON ON ON ON 13 12X18 2 ON ON ON 14 U1 ON ON 15 U2 ON 16 no cassette ON actuator pressed i e 0 in reference to a check in I O mode 1 279 x 431 8 mm 2 305 x 457 mm ...

Page 341: ...of paper inside the cassette is detected using the following three sensors F 10 13 T 10 12 1 Flag 6 Paper level sensor flag 2 Cassette paper sensor 7 Lifter gear 3 Gear 8 Tray 4 Cassette paper level sensor A 9 Paper 5 Cassette paper level sensor B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 342: ...tte is half full of paper Paper Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor A Paper Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor A If the cassette has no paper Paper tray Cassette paper sensor Flag ON ON View from the Front of the Machine Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor A ...

Page 343: ...the pickup vertical path roller pre registration roller is then used to move the paper a fara as the kegistatoin roller upper lower The pickup vertical path roller and the pre registration roller are each driven by the pickup 1 motor and the pre registration motor respectively F 10 15 Paper level sensor A Paper level sensor B Paper sensor Level of paper Indication on control panel off off off 100 ...

Page 344: ...al path roller 9 Retard guide 4 Feed roller roller B 10 Separation ton roller roller C 5 Pickup roller roller A 11 Retard spring 6 Cassette paper sensor Print start 2 76sec approx 1 3sec approx PRINT LSTR Cassette 1 pickup motor M6 Cassette pickup solenoid SL3 Cassette retry paper sensor PS16 Registration sensor PS26 Pre registration sensor M9 Registration motor M8 ...

Page 345: ...ifter moves up an a single sheet of paper is separed and moved ahead by the work of the pickup feeder roller and the separation roller F 10 17 T 10 15 1 Paper tray 6 Manual feeder separation roller 2 Side guide plate 7 Registration multi frame 3 Paper flag 8 Last paper pick roll 4 Manual feed feeder roller 9 Lifter 5 Pickup guide plate 1 2 9 3 4 5 6 8 7 ...

Page 346: ...le resistor operating in conjunction with the movemetn of the side guide epatle The side guide plate on the manual feed tray is set by the user when he she deposit paper F 10 19 Print start 1 9 sec approx PRINT LSTR Pre registration motor M9 Manual feed pickup Solenoid SL1 Registration sensor PS26 Registration motor M8 Slide guide rear Slide guide front Variable resistor Manual feed tray ...

Page 347: ...en paper is placed its weight pushes down the paper detecting flag thus enabling the manual feed paper sensor PS10 to detect the presence of paper F 10 20 Paper Paper detecting flag Manual feed paper sensor PS10 Manual feed paper sensor PS10 Paper detecting flag Paper ...

Page 348: ...ly when the last paper is picked up otherwise it remains still The machine will identify the paper to be the last paper if it detects 4 or more output pules form the lat paper sensor F 10 21 Manual feed last paper sensor PS9 Last paper detecting roll Last paper Manual feed lsat paper sensor PS9 Last paper detecting roll Last paper If 4 or more output pulses are detected the paper is identified as ...

Page 349: ... 22 When fitted to the machine When the multi upper guide is shifted up Machine rail Upper guide preasure spring Area of upper guide to be locked in place Upper guide locking arm Mobile rail Machine rail Upper guide pressure spring Mobile rail Upper guide locking arm open unlocked Area of upper guide to be locked in place Registration multi upper guide Registration Nip Released The shape of the ca...

Page 350: ...23 Pre registration motor M9 Registration motor M8 Manual feed pickup solenoid Manual feed control gear Manual feed roller shaft Duplex roller shaft Lower registration roller Upper registration roller Pre registration roller ...

Page 351: ...eversing sheet 9 Delivery cooling duct 2 Reversing rollre 10 Arching assembly 3 Reversing sheet 11 Duplex roller 2 4 Face up delivery roller 12 Duplex horizontal registration sensor PS22 5 Cross path flapper 13 Duplex roller 3 6 Duple roller 1 14 Duplex roller 4 7 FU FD swtycing flapper 15 Re pickup roller 8 Internal delivery roller 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ...

Page 352: ...point of laser exposure T 10 17 F 10 25 Detecting of paper position duplex horizontal registration sensor PS22 Timing of detection starts a specifi peirrod of time after pasage over the duplex registraont neosr PS21 Dive horizontal registration motor M25 Identifiaotin of position with refenced to the pulse form the horizontal registration motor Duplex horizontal registration sensor PS22 Horizontal...

Page 353: ...eets in Circulation The number on a white backgoudn and the nbuer on a black background indicated the 1s side and the 2nd side respse3ctively F 10 26 F 10 27 1 point of reversal 2 1 2 3 1 2 4 2 1 duplex pre registration check on horizontal registration ...

Page 354: ...Chapter 10 10 27 F 10 28 F 10 29 5 1 2 1 2 3 in wait for re pickup 6 with 2 sheets inside duplex unit 7 1 2 3 4 8 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 355: ...Chapter 10 10 28 F 10 30 F 10 31 9 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 10 thereafter repeats 7 through 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 12 1 2 3 4 5 ...

Page 356: ... 4 Face Down Delivery A3 3 Sheets in Cirucilation The nbuemr on a white background and the nbuemr on a black backgrdoun indicated the 1st side and he 2nd side respectively F 10 33 13 1 2 3 4 5 14 1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 1 point of reversal ...

Page 357: ...Chapter 10 10 30 F 10 34 F 10 35 3 1 4 1 duplex pre registration check on horizontal registration 5 1 2 6 1 2 in wait for re pickup point of reversal ...

Page 358: ...Chapter 10 10 31 F 10 36 F 10 37 5 1 2 6 1 2 in wait for re pickup point of reversal 9 1 2 3 10 1 2 3 ...

Page 359: ... of the following 3 types of delivery paper apths face deown delivery center delivery tray face down delivery copy tray face up device r side delivery tray F 10 38 Face down delivery copy tray Face up delivery side delivery tray Face down delivery center delivery tray ...

Page 360: ...n Delivery After moving thtough the fixing unit the paper moves along the FU FD switching flapper now facing downawar it then pushes down the plastic sheet to move to the vertical path diecoint for face down delivery F 10 39 Plastic sheet FU FD switching flapper ...

Page 361: ...ign flapper which has been shfited up by the delivery path switching solenoid SL2 at this time the cross path flapper is also siwtched over by the work of the delivery path switching solenoid 2 SL5 thus guding the paper into the direction of face up delivery F 10 40 FU FD switching flapper Cross path flapper Face up delivery side delivery tray ...

Page 362: ...the plastic sheet and then moves ahead in the direction of the centra tray Immeiately after the trailig edge of the paper moves past the palstc film the momevement stops at which time the movmeent rverses so that the paper moves along the plastic sheet in the direction of the copy tray F 10 42 Plastic sheet Center tray delivery Paper Copy tray delivery Copy tray delivery Paper Paper Plastic sheet ...

Page 363: ...he Right Rear Cover 4 Remove the pickup vertical path cover 3 screw 2 remove the pickup vertical path lower cover 1 If the machine is equipped with a pedestal remove the pedestal right cover then detach the pickup vertical path lower cover in advance F 10 43 10 10 1 2 Removing the Pickup Unit 1 Remove the pickup unit 3 connector 1 4 screws 2 F 10 44 10 10 2 Cassette Size Detection Unit 10 10 2 1 P...

Page 364: ...0 3 Pre registration Roller 10 10 3 1 Preparation for Removing the Pre registration Roller 1 Remove the manual feeder unit page 10 52 Reference Removing the Manual Feed Unit 2 Remove the manual feeder unit cover page 12 28 Reference Removing the Manual Feed Unit Cover 3 Remove the motor cover 3 1 Remove the motor cover 2 found at the rear 1 screw 1 F 10 47 4 Remove the motor mounting plate 3 clamp...

Page 365: ...nual Feed Unit 2 Remove the manual feeder unit cover page 12 28 Reference Removing the Manual Feed Unit Cover 3 Remove the motor cover 3 1 Remove the motor cover 2 found at the rear 1 screw 1 F 10 50 4 Remove the motor mounting plate 3 clamps 1 3 connectors 2 3 screws 3 10 10 4 2 Remove the Registration Lower Roller 1 Remove the belt 1 ÅAwasher 2 ÅAE rings 3 ÅAgear 4 found at the rear F 10 51 2 Re...

Page 366: ...6 10 10 5 Re pickup Roller 10 10 5 1 Preparation for Removing the Re pickup Roller 1 Remove the manual feeder unit page 10 52 Reference Removing the Manual Feed Unit 2 Remove the manual feeder unit cover page 12 28 Reference Removing the Manual Feed Unit Cover 3 Remove the motor cover 3 1 Remove the motor cover 2 found at the rear 1 screw 1 F 10 57 4 Remove the motor mounting plate 3 clamps 1 3 co...

Page 367: ... F 10 59 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the guide 2 F 10 60 4 Remove the bearing 1 then move the roller 2 in the direction of the arrow to detach F 10 61 10 10 6 Pickup Roller 10 10 6 1 Preparation for Removing the Pickup Roller 1 Remove the cassette MEMO The cassette 1 2 and the pick up unit 1 2 may also be removed in the same way 1 1 Slide out the cassette 1 1 2 3 4 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 368: ...O The cassette 1 2 and the pick up unit 1 2 may also be removed in the same way 1 1 Slide out the cassette 10 10 7 2 Removing the Feeding Roller 1 Put your hand through the machine s front then pick the tab A of the feed roller and pull it out F 10 63 10 10 8 Separation Roller 10 10 8 1 Preparation for Removing the Separation Roller 1 Remove the cassette MEMO The cassette 1 2 and the pick up unit ...

Page 369: ...ar upper cover page 12 25 Reference Removing the Rear Upper Cover 3 Remove the rear lower cover page 12 25 Reference Removing the Rear Lower Cover 4 Remove the IH power supply unit page 12 32 Reference Removing the IH Power Supply Unit 5 Remove the DC power supply unit page 12 32 Reference Removing the DC Power Supply Unit 10 10 9 2 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor 1 Remove the cassette pickup m...

Page 370: ...r 3 Remove the rear right cover page 12 22 Reference Removing of the Right Rear Cover 4 Remove the pickup vertical path cover 3 1 screw 2 remove the pickup vertical path lower cover 1 F 10 68 5 Remove the pickup unit page 10 36 Reference Removing the Pickup Unit 6 Remove the pick up system sensor mounting plate 6 1 Remove the bracket 2 2 screws 1 at the rear F 10 69 6 2 Remove the sensor mounting ...

Page 371: ...s to Note When Mounting the Pickup System Sensor Mounting Plate Points to Note When Mounting the Sensor Mounting Plate Any of the gears can drop off When attaching the sensor mounting plate be sure that the pickup unit will not face downward 1 Remove the E ring and the gear 1 F 10 72 2 Attach the bushing 1 to the frame then attach the gear shaft 2 F 10 73 ...

Page 372: ...n for Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor 1 Remove the cassette MEMO The cassette 1 2 and the pick up unit 1 2 may also be removed in the same way 1 1 Slide out the cassette 2 Remove the front right cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Right Front Cover 3 Remove the rear right cover page 12 22 Reference Removing of the Right Rear Cover 4 Remove the pickup vertical path cover 3 1 screw 2 remove t...

Page 373: ...en attaching the sensor mounting plate be sure that the pickup unit will not face downward F 10 78 10 10 11 2 Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor 1 Remove the cassette paper sensor 2 connector 1 F 10 79 10 10 11 3 Points to Note When Mounting the Pickup System Sensor Mounting Plate Points to Note When Mounting the Sensor Mounting Plate Any of the gears can drop off When attaching the sensor mountin...

Page 374: ... 2 F 10 83 5 Turn the gears to see that the movement is smooth 10 10 12 Cassette Paper Level Sensor A B 10 10 12 1 Preparation for Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor A B 1 Remove the cassette MEMO The cassette 1 2 and the pick up unit 1 2 may also be removed in the same way 1 1 Slide out the cassette 2 Remove the front right cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Right Front Cover 3 Remove ...

Page 375: ...ve the bracket 2 2 screws 1 at the rear F 10 85 6 2 Remove the sensor mounting plate 5 connector 1 screw 2 cassette pickup solenoid 3 5 screws 4 Points to Note When Mounting the Sensor Mounting Plate Any of the gears can drop off When attaching the sensor mounting plate be sure that the pickup unit will not face downward F 10 86 10 10 12 2 Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor A B 1 Remove the ...

Page 376: ...plate be sure that the pickup unit will not face downward 1 Remove the E ring and the gear 1 F 10 88 2 Attach the bushing 1 to the frame then attach the gear shaft 2 F 10 89 3 Fit the 6 locations A indicated in the figure firmly into the holes of the mounting plate then secure the sensor mounting plate 2 in place F 10 90 4 Attach the gear 1 and the E ring 2 F 10 91 5 Turn the gears to see that the...

Page 377: ...ve the upper cover 2 F 10 92 MEMO When attaching the upper cover 1 and the lower cover 2 match the markings A found on the side and move them into place F 10 93 10 10 13 2 Removing the Slide Resistor Points to Note Removing the Slide Resistor When removing the slide resistor do not apply excess force when spreading the claw of the lower cover otherwise the claw can break When attaching the slide r...

Page 378: ... the same way 1 1 Slide out the cassette 2 Remove the front right cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Right Front Cover 3 Remove the rear right cover page 12 22 Reference Removing of the Right Rear Cover 4 Remove the pickup vertical path cover 3 1 screw 2 remove the pickup vertical path lower cover 1 F 10 96 5 Remove the pickup unit page 10 36 Reference Removing the Pickup Unit 10 10 14 2 Remo...

Page 379: ...ing the Manual Feed Tray Unit 1 Remove the base 2 3 screws 1 F 10 98 2 Remove the motor cover 2 1 screw 1 F 10 99 3 While opening the face plate 2 shift the manual feed tray 3 90 deg or more to detach it upward 1 connector 1 at the rear When detaching the face plate take care not to lose the spring attached to the front F 10 100 10 10 16 Manual Feed Unit 10 10 16 1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 1 ...

Page 380: ...emoving the Manual Feed Unit 2 Remove the manual feed unit cover page 12 28 Reference Removing the Manual Feed Unit Cover 10 10 17 2 Removing the Manual Feed Roller 1 Remove the mounting plate 2 3 screws 1 F 10 103 2 Remove the bushing 2 gear 1 at the front For both gear and the bushing free the claw fitted in the groove of the roller for detachment F 10 104 3 Push in the bearing 1 found at the re...

Page 381: ...d Separation Roller 10 10 18 1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Feed Separation Roller 1 Remove the manual feed unit page 10 52 Reference Removing the Manual Feed Unit 2 Remove the manual feed unit cover page 12 28 Reference Removing the Manual Feed Unit Cover 3 Remove the motor cover 3 1 Remove the motor cover 2 at the rear 1 screw 1 F 10 108 4 Remove the manual feed roller page 10 53 Referenc...

Page 382: ... when removing the face plate F 10 109 When attaching the face plate be sure that the spring 2 fits into the hole 1 found on the front side of the arm F 10 110 2 Remove the rear guide 1 and the middle guide 2 Free the snap in claw F 10 111 3 Pick the tab A of the manual feed separation roller 2 and pull it out in the direction of the arrow F 10 112 ...

Page 383: ... 10 52 Reference Removing the Manual Feed Tray Unit 4 Remove the manual feed tray upper cover lower cover 4 1 Spread the side guide 1 of the manual feed tray unit and separate it into the upper cover 2 and the lower cover 3 for detachment F 10 113 MEMO When attaching the upper cover 1 and the lower cover 2 match the markings A found on the side and move them into place F 10 114 10 10 19 2 Removing...

Page 384: ...nual Feed Roller 4 Remove the motor cover 4 1 Remove the motor cover 2 at the rear screw 1 F 10 117 5 Remove the manual feeder tray unit page 10 52 Reference Removing the Manual Feed Tray Unit 10 10 20 2 Removing the Manual Feed sensor 1 Remove the face plate 1 Referring to procedure 10 10 18 2 Remove the rear guide 1 and the middle guide 2 Free the snap in claw Referring to procedure 10 10 18 3 R...

Page 385: ...r 1 While taking care not to touch the light emitting face remove the transparency sensor 1 F 10 121 10 10 22 Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid 10 10 22 1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid 1 Remove the manual feed unit page 10 52 Reference Removing the Manual Feed Unit 2 Remove the manual feed unit cover page 12 28 Reference Removing the Manual Feed Unit Cover 3 Remove the motor c...

Page 386: ...he manual feed unit page 10 52 Reference Removing the Manual Feed Unit 2 Remove the manual feed unit cover page 12 28 Reference Removing the Manual Feed Unit Cover 3 Remove the motor cover 3 1 Remove the motor cover 2 at the rear screw 1 F 10 125 10 10 23 2 Removing the Registration Motor 1 Remove the registration motor 3 connector 1 2 screws 2 F 10 126 When mounting the registration motor be sure...

Page 387: ...on motor 3 connector 1 2 screws 2 F 10 128 When mounting the registration motor be sure that the belt is fitted to the gear of the motor shaft 10 10 25 Horizontal Registration Motor 10 10 25 1 Preparatiuon for Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor 1 Remove the fixing unit 1 1 Remove the fixing drive unit page 11 38 Reference Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 1 2 Remove the fixing unit 2 Remove t...

Page 388: ...130 4 2 Remove the sheet 1 from behind the fixing feeder assembly 6 snap ons A 3 hooks B F 10 131 5 Remove the horizontal registration motor support plate 3 connector 1 2 screws 2 F 10 132 When mounting to the horizontal registration motor support plate 1 be sure that the area A of the horizontal registration motor support plate is in firm contact with the ground spring 2 found at the bottom of th...

Page 389: ...1 Remove the sensor base 3 found at the bottom 3 connectors 1 2 screws 2 F 10 135 10 10 26 2 Removing the Registration Sensor 1 While taking care not to touch the light emitting face of the transparency sensor 1 remove the registration sensor 2 F 10 136 10 10 27 Fixing Feeder Unit 10 10 27 1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 1 Remove the fixing unit 1 1 Remove the fixing drive unit p...

Page 390: ...e rear right cover page 12 22 Reference Removing of the Right Rear Cover 4 Remove the pickup vertical path cover 3 1 screw 2 remove the pickup vertical path lower cover 1 F 10 138 5 Remove the pickup unit page 10 36 Reference Removing the Pickup Unit 6 Remove the pick up system sensor mounting plate 6 1 Remove the bracket 2 3 screws 1 at the rear F 10 139 6 2 Remove the sensor mounting plate 5 con...

Page 391: ...t the front move the vertical path roller 2 to the rear and then pull it upward to remove F 10 142 10 10 28 3 Points to Note When Mounting the Pickup System Sensor Mounting Plate Points to Note When Mounting the Sensor Mounting Plate Any of the gears can drop off When attaching the sensor mounting plate be sure that the pickup unit will not face downward 1 Remove the E ring and the gear 1 F 10 143...

Page 392: ...g 2 F 10 146 5 Turn the gears to see that the movement is smooth 10 10 29 Inside Delivery Roller 10 10 29 1 Preparation for Removing the Inside Delivery Roller 1 Remove the fixing unit 1 1 Remove the fixing drive unit page 11 38 Reference Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 1 2 Remove the fixing unit 2 Remove the fixing feeder unit page 10 63 Reference Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 10 10 29 2 Removin...

Page 393: ...or 10 10 30 1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit Open Closed Sensor 1 Remove the upper left cover page 12 23 Reference Removing the Upper Left Cover 2 Remove the center delivery tray 2 2 screws 1 F 10 150 3 Remove the delivery vertical path unit New page 10 93 Reference Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit 4 Remove the fixing feeder unit open closed sensor mounting plate Before re...

Page 394: ...0 10 30 2 Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit Open Closed Sensor 1 Remove the fixing feeder open closed sensor 1 F 10 153 10 10 30 3 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Feeding Unit Open Closed Sensor 2 1 Remove the waste toner container 1 1 Open the front cover and turn the intermediate transfer unit release lever 1 to disengage F 10 154 ...

Page 395: ...2 Remove the front cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Front Cover 3 Remove the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever 2 1 screw 1 F 10 156 4 Remove the cleaner fan cover 2 1 screw 1 F 10 157 5 Remove the inside cover lower 3 1 connector 1 5 screws 2 F 10 158 ...

Page 396: ...1 F 10 160 3 Remove the fixing feeding unit open close sensor 2 1 F 10 161 10 10 31 Fixing Arching Sensor 10 10 31 1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Arching Sensor 1 Remove the fixing unit 1 1 Remove the fixing drive unit page 11 38 Reference Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 1 2 Remove the fixing unit 2 Remove the fixing feeder unit page 10 63 Reference Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 10 10 31 2...

Page 397: ... right cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Right Front Cover 3 Remove the rear right cover page 12 22 Reference Removing of the Right Rear Cover 4 Remove the pickup vertical path cover 3 1 screw 2 remove the pickup vertical path lower cover 1 F 10 164 5 Remove the pickup unit 3 page 10 36 Reference Removing the Pickup Unit 10 10 32 2 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover Open Closed Sensor 1...

Page 398: ...ference Removing the Upper Left Cover 2 Remove the center delivery tray 2 2 screws 1 F 10 168 3 Remove the delivery vertical path unit New page 10 93 Reference Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit 4 Remove the fixing feeder unit open closed sensor mounting plate Before removing the fixing feeder unit be sure to mark its position using a scriber F 10 169 4 1 Remove the fixing feeder unit open c...

Page 399: ...unit page 10 52 Reference Removing the Manual Feed Unit 10 10 34 2 Removing the Disconnecting the Drawer Connector manual feed unit 1 Slide out the drawer connector 2 2 screws 1 F 10 172 2 Remove the drawer connector 2 2 connectors 1 from behind F 10 173 10 10 35 Drawer Connector fixing feeder unit 10 10 35 1 Preparation for Removing the Drawer Connector fixing feeder unit 1 Remove the fixing unit...

Page 400: ...6 Duplex Roller 1 10 10 36 1 Preparation for Removing the Duplex Roller 1 1 Remove the fixing unit 1 1 Remove the fixing drive unit page 11 38 Reference Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 1 2 Remove the fixing unit 2 Remove the fixing feeder unit page 10 63 Reference Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 10 10 36 2 Removing the Duplex Roller 1 1 Open the cover of the fixing feeder unit 1 F 10 176 2 Remove t...

Page 401: ...rounding wire 2 1 E ring 3 F 10 178 3 2 Remove the fixing feeding unit cover 1 screw 1 at the front 1 cover fixing pin 2 F 10 179 4 Remove the gear mounting plate 4 1 Remove the fixing stay found at the rear 3 screws 1 F 10 180 4 2 Remove the gear mounting plate 2 2 screws 1 F 10 181 1 3 4 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 ...

Page 402: ...late take care so that the belt 4 will not slip off the gear 3 F 10 182 6 Remove the gear 1 and the bearing 2 at the rear F 10 183 7 Remove the 2 duplex auxiliary guides 1 of the duplex roller F 10 184 8 Remove the delivery path switching solenoid 2 3 together with the base screw 1 connector 2 F 10 185 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 ...

Page 403: ...the bearing 2 F 10 186 10 Remove the duplexing roller 1 F 10 187 Points to Note When Attaching the Duplex Roller 1 Be sure that the longer side A of the D cut in the roller shaft 1 is toward the front F 10 188 2 When attaching be sure that the front tip of the roller shaft is in contact with the grounding plate A F 10 189 ...

Page 404: ...1 2 Remove the fixing unit 2 Remove the fixing feeder unit page 10 63 Reference Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 3 Lift the duplexing open close guide 3 in the direction of A and shift it in the direction of B Then remove it 1 connector 2 Open sheet 1 F 10 190 10 10 37 2 Removing the Duplex Roller 2 1 Remove the 2 E rings 1 F 10 191 2 Move the bearing 1 to release the duplexing roller 2 2 F 10 192 ...

Page 405: ...g roller 2 4 1 E ring 1 1 clutch 2 2 bearings 3 F 10 195 10 10 38 Duplex Roller 3 10 10 38 1 Preparation for Removing the Duplex Roller 3 1 Remove the fixing unit 1 1 Remove the fixing drive unit page 11 38 Reference Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 1 2 Remove the fixing unit 2 Remove the fixing feeder unit page 10 63 Reference Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 3 Lift the duplexing open close guide 3 ...

Page 406: ...rame 2 in the direction of the arrow slightly and route the connectors 3 between the frame and the guide 3 screws 1 3 2 Disconnect the connector 3 F 10 199 4 Remove the duplexing roller 3 together with the duplexing pickup clutch and the roller shaft 5 Remove the duplexing roller 3 5 1 E ring 1 1 clutch 2 2 bearings 3 1 gear 4 F 10 200 When mounting it be sure to orient it so that the clutch stop ...

Page 407: ...e Duplex Roller 4 1 Remove the fixing unit 1 1 Remove the fixing drive unit page 11 38 Reference Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 1 2 Remove the fixing unit 2 Remove the fixing feeder unit page 10 63 Reference Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 3 Lift the duplexing open close guide 3 in the direction of A and shift it in the direction of B Then remove it 1 connector 2 Open sheet 1 F 10 203 A 1 2 3 A B ...

Page 408: ...e fixing unit 1 1 Remove the fixing drive unit page 11 38 Reference Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 1 2 Remove the fixing unit 2 Remove the fixing feeder unit page 10 63 Reference Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 10 10 40 2 Removing the Duplex Feed Motor 0012 4550 Color iR C5180i Color iR C5180 Color iR C4580G Color iR C4580i Color iR C4580 Color iR C4080G Color iR C4080i Color iR C4080 Color Image ...

Page 409: ...x Registration Sensor 1 Remove the fixing unit 1 1 Remove the fixing drive unit page 11 38 Reference Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 1 2 Remove the fixing unit 2 Remove the fixing feeder unit page 10 63 Reference Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 3 Remove the fixing feeder assembly back sheet When placing the fixing feeder unit upright be sure to use paper to prevent dirt from collecting If you forgo...

Page 410: ...al Registration Sensor 1 Remove the fixing unit 1 1 Remove the fixing drive unit page 11 38 Reference Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 1 2 Remove the fixing unit 2 Remove the fixing feeder unit page 10 63 Reference Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 3 Remove the fixing feeder assembly back sheet When placing the fixing feeder unit upright be sure to use paper to prevent dirt from collecting If you forg...

Page 411: ...otor support plate 3 connector 1 2 screws 2 F 10 214 When attaching the horizontal registration motor support plate 1 be sure to bring the horizontal registration motor support plate firmly in contact with the grounding lead spring 2 found under the guide plate After replacement check that the sensor flag moves smoothly F 10 215 B A A 1 1 2 3 1 2 A ...

Page 412: ... cable 1 coming from the duplex horizontal registration sensor if you twist it inadvertently the loop area will not move smoothly F 10 217 After replacement check that the sensor flag moves smoothly 10 10 43 Duplex Pickup Sensor 10 10 43 1 Preparation for Removing the Duplex Pickup Sensor 1 Remove the cleaner fan cover 1 1 Open the front cover 1 2 Remove the cleaner fan cover 2 1 screw 1 F 10 218 ...

Page 413: ...ews 9 Remove the pickup vertical path cover 3 screws 2 Remove the pickup vertical path lower cover 1 F 10 221 10 Remove the pickup unit page 10 36 Reference Removing the Pickup Unit 11 Remove the rear fan cover page 12 25 Reference Removing the Rear Fan Cover 12 Remove the rear upper cover page 12 25 Reference Removing the Rear Upper Cover 13 Remove the rear lower cover page 12 25 Reference Removi...

Page 414: ...insert a hand from the inside of the pulled out manual feed unit Then remove it from the rear side plate while pressing the swing plate 1 located in the read side of the drum drive unit The drum drive unit is hung from a boss attached to the rear side plate so lift up the unit when removing it F 10 224 20 Remove the manual feed cooling fan duct 4 including the fan 2 Wire saddle 1 1 Connectors 2 3 ...

Page 415: ...the rail support plate 2 of the manual feed unit 2 screws 1 from the rear side plate side F 10 227 2 Remove the rail guide 3 of the manual feed unit as shown 3 screws 1 from the side of the rear side plate 3 screws 2 from the side of the front side plate F 10 228 3 Remove the drawer connector support plate 2 2 screws 1 F 10 229 ...

Page 416: ...paration for Removing the Duplex Registration Clutch 1 Remove the fixing unit 1 1 Remove the fixing drive unit page 11 38 Reference Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 1 2 Remove the fixing unit 2 Remove the fixing feeder unit page 10 63 Reference Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 3 Lift the duplexing open close guide 3 in the direction of A and shift it in the direction of B Then remove it 1 connector 2...

Page 417: ... the bushing 1 to free the duplex roller 2 2 F 10 235 When attaching it fit it while turning the duplex roller 2 2 so as not to bend the sheet 1 of the duplex guide plate Do not shift up the sheet by hand F 10 236 3 Pull the duplex registration clutch 3 upward to remove 1 connector 1 1 clutch stop 2 F 10 237 ...

Page 418: ...eference Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 1 2 Remove the fixing unit 2 Remove the fixing feeder unit page 10 63 Reference Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 3 Lift the duplexing open close guide 3 in the direction of A and shift it in the direction of B Then remove it 1 connector 2 Open sheet 1 F 10 239 10 10 45 2 Removing the Duplex Pickup Clutch 1 Open the cover of the fixing feeder unit 1 F 10 240 2...

Page 419: ...move the 3 screws 1 4 2 Pull the plate 2 in the direction of the arrow and pull out the connector 3 located the inner of the plate F 10 243 4 3 Remove the connector 3 F 10 244 5 Remove the duplex pickup clutch 2 1 roller shaft 1 E ring 1 F 10 245 When attaching be sure that the stop A of the clutch is at the bottommost F 10 246 2 1 1 3 1 1 1 2 A ...

Page 420: ...over 10 10 46 2 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit For the new delivery vertical path unit to function the version of the DC controller must be 3 06 or later Be sure to check its version in service mode COPIER DISPLAY VERSION D CON 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the delivery vertical path cover 3 1 screw 1 1 delivery inside cover 2 F 10 248 3 Remove the delivery path vertical u...

Page 421: ... inside cover to the new delivery vertical path cover 2 then fix it in place using the slip stop 3 F 10 251 10 10 46 4 Points to note when mouting the delivery vertical path unit 1 Attach the top 1 of the delivery vertical path inside of the machine plate 2 When attaching the delivery vertical path unit be sure to lift it once before setting it in place Engage the left and right hooks 3 on the mac...

Page 422: ...then close the delivery vertical path cover 3 and put the fixing feeding unit back in its initial position F 10 255 10 10 47 Face Down Delivery Roller 1 10 10 47 1 Preparation for Removing the Face Down Delivery Roller 1 1 Remove the upper left cover page 12 23 Reference Removing the Upper Left Cover 2 Remove the center delivery tray 2 Referring to procedure 10 10 54 3 Remove the delivery vertical...

Page 423: ...delivery sensor 1 and pull it upward to remove F 10 257 MEMO The edge of the sensor flag is cut to an I shape permitting it to be removed upward F 10 258 Points to Note When Attaching the Sensor Flag When attaching the sensor flag be sure to match the L shaped area A of the spring against the groove B of the face down delivery sub frame F 10 259 10 10 47 2 Removing the Face Down Delivery Roller 1 ...

Page 424: ...0 261 Points to Note When Attaching the grounding Leaf Spring When attaching shape the grounding leaf plate removed in 3 into a half loop and work so that the frame plate 1 and the grounding leaf spring 2 are in contact F 10 262 3 Remove the face down delivery roller 1 5 E ring 1 bushing 2 1 gear 3 1 bushing 4 found to the rear of the face down delivery roller 1 F 10 263 ...

Page 425: ...e the fixing feeder unit page 10 63 Reference Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 3 Remove the fixing feeder unit cover 3 1 Release the link 4 1 screw 1 at the rear 1 grounding wire 2 1 E ring 3 F 10 264 3 2 Remove the fixing feeder unit cover 3 screw 1 at the front cover fixing pin 2 F 10 265 F 10 266 4 Remove the inside delivery roller 4 1 Remove the E ring 1 and the bushing 2 at the front then remo...

Page 426: ...he Face Up Delivery Roller 1 Remove the lower guide 2 2 2 screws 1 F 10 269 2 Remove the gear 3 1 Screw 1 1 Gear mount 2 2 Belt 4 F 10 270 3 Remove the upper guide 3 screw 1 of the gear mounting plate 2 F 10 271 The spring 1 hooked on the flapper of the upper guide is small and can easily be lost Remove it in advance F 10 272 1 1 2 4 2 1 3 3 1 2 ...

Page 427: ...Vertical Path Roller 1 1 Remove the upper left cover page 12 23 Reference Removing the Upper Left Cover 2 Remove the center delivery tray 2 Referring to procedure 10 10 54 3 Remove the delivery vertical path unit page 10 93 Reference Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit 4 Remove the face down delivery Motor page 10 102 Reference Removing the Face Down Delivery Motor 5 Remove the delivery verti...

Page 428: ...h Roller 2 1 Remove the upper left cover page 12 23 Reference Removing the Upper Left Cover 2 Remove the center delivery tray 2 Referring to procedure 10 10 54 3 Remove the delivery vertical path unit page 10 93 Reference Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit 4 Remove the face down delivery motor page 10 102 Reference Removing the Face Down Delivery Motor 5 Remove the delivery vertical path mot...

Page 429: ... 10 10 54 3 Remove the delivery vertical path unit page 10 93 Reference Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit 10 10 51 2 Removing the Face Down Delivery Motor 1 Remove the face down delivery motor 5 1 Harness 2 free from the wire saddle 1 1 Connector 3 2 Screw 4 F 10 282 10 10 52 Delivery Vertical Path Motor 10 10 52 1 Preparation for Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Motor 1 Remove the upper...

Page 430: ... 2 Remove the center delivery tray 2 Referring to procedure 10 10 54 3 Remove the delivery vertical path unit page 10 93 Reference Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit 10 10 53 2 Removing the Face Down Delivery Sensor 1 1 Press down the flag retainer 1 in the direction of A and pull up the sensor flag 2 in the direction of B Then remove the sensor flag by pulling it in the direction of C F 10 ...

Page 431: ...Center Delivery Tray Full sensor 10 10 54 1 Preparaion for Removing the Center Delivery Tray Full sensor 1 Remove the upper left cover page 12 23 Reference Removing the Upper Left Cover 2 Remove the center delivery tray 2 2 screws 1 F 10 288 3 Remove the delivery vertical path unit page 10 93 Reference Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit 10 10 54 2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray Full senso...

Page 432: ... 55 2 Removing the Face Down Delivery Sensor 2 1 Remove the face down delivery motor mounting plate page 10 102 Reference Removing the Face Down Delivery Motor 2 Remove the delivery vertical path motor page 10 103 Reference Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Motor 3 Remove the motor mount 2 4 Screws 1 F 10 290 4 Remove the face down delivery sensor 2 3 1 Sensor plug 1 1 Connector 2 F 10 291 Point...

Page 433: ...d 1 1 Remove the upper left cover page 12 23 Reference Removing the Upper Left Cover 2 Remove the center delivery tray 2 Referring to procedure 10 10 54 3 Remove the delivery vertical path unit page 10 93 Reference Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit 4 Remove the cleaner fan cover 5 Remove the cleaner fan 2 page 12 59 Reference Removing the Cleaner Fan Leave the 2 screws as they are and disco...

Page 434: ...n for Removing the Face Down Delivery Roller 1 Drive Belt 1 Remove the upper left cover page 12 23 Reference Removing the Upper Left Cover 2 Remove the center delivery tray 2 Referring to procedure 10 10 54 3 Remove the delivery vertical path unit page 10 93 Reference Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit 10 10 59 2 Removing the Face Down Delivery Roller 1 Drive Belt 1 Free the protrusion 1 of ...

Page 435: ...Chapter 11 FIXING SYSTEM ...

Page 436: ... 16 11 2 2 8 In case of recovery from sleep mode 11 17 11 2 2 9 At Low Power Power Save Mode 11 17 11 2 2 10 The service mode regarding the fixing temperature control 11 18 11 2 3 Detecting the Passage of Paper 11 19 11 2 3 1 Detection of paper passage 11 19 11 2 4 Belting inclined Control 11 20 11 2 4 1 Belt Displacement Control 11 20 11 2 4 2 Belt Full Displacement Temporary Escape Mode 11 25 11...

Page 437: ...7 11 5 11 Fixing Delivery Sensor 11 47 11 5 12 Fixing Belt Position Sensor Unit 11 48 11 5 13 Fixing Releasing HP Sensor 11 50 11 5 14 Fixing Wrap Sensor 11 50 11 5 15 Fixing Motor Unit 11 51 11 5 16 Fixing Pressure Motor Unit 11 51 11 5 17 Fixing Belt Displacement Control Motor Unit 11 51 11 5 18 Pressure Belt Displacement Control Motor Unit 11 53 ...

Page 438: ... Fixing temperature detection Upper Belt Unit fixing main thermistor contact fixing sub thermistor 1 contact fixing sub thermistor 2 contact Lower Belt Unit pressure main thermistor non contact pressure sub thermistor 1 contact pressure sub thermistor 2 contact Protective mechanism A check is run for the following thereby cutting the power to the fixing heater in the event of a fault thermistor te...

Page 439: ...12 Pressure roller center 23 5 mm dia ends 18 5 mm dia 13 Pressure belt tension roller center 21 5 mm dia ends 18 5 mm dia 14 Pressure heater H1 halogen heater 300 W 15 Pressure main thermistor TH4 non contact type temperature control overheating detection 16 Pressure sub thermistor TH5 contact type overheating detection 17 Pressure sub thermistor 2 TH6 contact type overheating detection 18 Pressu...

Page 440: ...osition 32 Pressure belt position sensor 1 PS36 Detects pressure belt position 33 Pressure belt position sensor 2 PS37 34 Pressure belt position sensor 3 PS38 35 Pressure belt HP sensor PS30 detects pressure belt home position 36 Fixing pressure release HP sensor PS46 detects pressure belt engagement 37 Fixing inlet sensor PS27 detects fixing inlet jams 38 Fixing outlet sensor PS25 detects fixing ...

Page 441: ...pter 11 11 4 F 11 1 F 11 2 24 25 4 6 5 7 15 37 17 16 38 39 18 26 27 30 28 29 31 33 32 34 35 36 C B A D A Fixing belt unit B Pressure belt unit C IH unit D Drive unit 1 2 3 8 11 10 13 21 22 23 9 14 19 20 12 ...

Page 442: ... AC driver circuit IH power supply circuit PCB J6 1 J6 2 J300 SUB_HEAT_ON PWM0_OUT IH_ON PWM1_OUT PWM2_OUT J109A 4 5 3 7 10 1 4 6 1 TP1 AC H AC N 2 J109A 16 J109A 5 J109A 6 J301 1 J620 1 J628 6 J11 2 J14 SUB HEAT H 13VA IH SUB HEAT N J625 2 J113A 11 TP3 H1 J108A J108B TH1 TH2 TH3 TH4 TH5 TH6 J302 11 J302 1 J302 12 J302 13 ...

Page 443: ...toner layer on the transparency 2 In the case of the Bk single color mode the speed is 45cpm 185mm sec however in the case of the automatic selection job ACS of black and white color even the print of only Bk the speed is 40cpm 163mm sec Once operates in the color mode 40cpm 163mm sec it will not switch to the Bk single color mode 45cpm 185mm sec unless the standby stop of the printer Mode Paper t...

Page 444: ...be always formed This control ends when the trailing edge of paper leaves the secondary transfer roller Flow of Control 1 Starting to Monitor the Arching of Paper The machine starts to monitor the arching of paper as soon as its leading edge has fully reached a point 10 mm of the fixing nip i e where the leading edge has fully reached the fixing assembly 2 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Motor...

Page 445: ...s based on the mechanism used when the fixing belt temperature is less than 100 deg C In fixing start up sequence the fixing belt target temperature and the pressure target temperature are used as target temperatures while the machine starts up supplying the IH heater with power to turn on the pressure heater until the start up end condition 1 is satisfied at which time the machine moves to standb...

Page 446: ... pressure belt deg C 140 Start up end temperature deg C fixing belt 200 200 200 200 pressure belt 100 120 110 100 WUT sec 240 300 270 240 iR C5180 iR C4580 4080 100V 120V 230V Target temperature deg C fixing belt 210 pressure belt 140 Start up end temperature deg C fixing belt 200 200 200 200 pressure belt 100 120 110 100 iR C5180 iR C4580 4080 100V 120V 230V Target temperature fixing belt deg C 2...

Page 447: ...eg C or more turn on IH heater and pressure heater at power on control the temperatures of the fixing pressure belts so that they reach their target temperatures When the fixing pressure belts reach their target temperature the machine moves to the standby mode F 11 7 0 100 IH Heater STBY WMUP 1 M24 H1 1 2 3 4 2 ...

Page 448: ...g C 200 Pressure belt deg C 140 Start up end condition Fixing belt deg C 200 200 200 200 Pressure belt deg C 100 120 110 100 iRC5180 iRC4580 4080 100V 120V 230V Target temperature Fixing belt deg C 210 Pressure belt deg C 140 Start up end condition Fixing belt deg C 200 200 200 200 Pressure belt deg C 100 120 110 100 iRC5180 iRC4580 4080 100V 120V 230V Target temperature Fixing belt deg C 200 Pres...

Page 449: ...Room temperature 18 deg C T 11 10 1 incl Job time 2 Temperature Table Low temperature Room temperature 18 deg C T 11 11 1 incl Job time 3 Temperature Table High temperature Room temperature 27 deg C T 11 12 1 incl Job time Time passed from ready sec 1 0 to 899 900 to iR C5180 Standby Fixing belt 200 deg C 200 deg C Pressure belt 140 deg C 140 deg C iR C4580 4080 Standby Fixing belt 200 deg C 200 d...

Page 450: ...re of the fixing belt is lowered in stages between 10 and 50 sec after the print is started Refer to the following table The following table indicates in case of the plain paper When the fixing delivery sensor is turned to off after the last sheet passes the power applied to the IH heater is stopped At the same time both the fixing motor and the fixing pressure motor are stopped and the pressure b...

Page 451: ...5 deg C 200 deg C 195 deg C 190 deg C 185 deg C 180 deg C 180 deg C Pressure belt OFF 1 5s 4 9s 3s 3s 1 1 1 2 3 3 1 IH Heater 1 2 3 4 5 STBY STBY PRINT 10s 20s 30s 40s 50s 300s M27 H1 120 140 185 190 195 200 205 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 32mm sec 1 Only the iR C5180 and the 230V model of the iR C4580 C3880 it is ON 2 The rotation speed of the belt varies depending on the paper type 3 The targ...

Page 452: ... fixing sub thermistor 2 TH3 detect less than 215 deg C the system moves to step 1 Time passed from Start of Printing 0 to 9 10 to 19 20 to 29 30 to 39 40 to 49 50 to 300 to iR C5180 Plain paper Fixing belt 210 deg C 205 deg C 200 deg C 195 deg C 190 deg C 190 deg C 190 deg C Pressure belt 140 deg C 120 deg C iR C4580 4080 Plain paper Fixing belt 210 deg C 205 deg C 200 deg C 195 deg C 190 deg C 1...

Page 453: ...lectric power capacity on the IH heater when either of sub thermistor 1 TH2 or sub thermistor 2 TH3 detects the temperature higher than 215 deg C electric capacity 1 in the print mode 700W The system recovers the electric capacity when both of sub thermistor 1 TH2 or sub thermistor 2 TH3 detect the temperature lower than 215 deg C 700W electric capacity 1 in the print mode 2 Step2 The system sets ...

Page 454: ...ion copier 2 120 deg C for high humidity environment ROM temperature 27 deg C 3 230 200 170sec are for 100V 120V 230V machines respectively Model Mode Item iRC 5180 iRC 4580 iRC 4080 Power save mode 10 Fixing belt temperature control deg C 110 140 1 90 130 1 200 Pressure heater Off Off 140 2 Recovery time sec 170sec or less 230 200 170sec or less 3 Power save mode 25 Fixing belt temperature contro...

Page 455: ...t 1 5 2 10 3 15 4 20 Usage Depending on the installation site environment or the customers way of using change the temperature at the standby 2 Pressure Belt Standby Temperature Change Mode name COPIER OPTION BODY FX L STB Functional Description Change the standby temperature of the pressure belt Setting Values 0 Default 1 5 2 10 3 15 4 20 Usage Depending on the installation site environment or th...

Page 456: ...lows Fixing inlet sensor PS27 Detects the passage of paper fed to the fixing unit Fixing delivery sensor PS25 Detects the paper delivered from the fixing unit Fixing wrap jam sensor PS29 Detects wrap jams F 11 10 2 J721A 1 3 GND FUSER_DELI_SNS 5V 4 J720B 3 5 5V GND FUSER_ENTER_SNS DC controller PCB2 MAICY J721B 9 TBF_NEW_SNS DC controller PCB2 MAICY PS25 PS27 PS29 ...

Page 457: ... detected position and the shifting direction of the belts By driving the fixing pressure displacement control motor M28 M29 shift the position of the tension roller in the 5 levels 1 If the belt shifts toward the front getting away from the standard position shift the belt to the center by rotating the fixing pressure displacement control motor in a clockwise direction and then shift the fixing p...

Page 458: ...hows the case of the fixing belt F 11 12 Example A condition that the belt tilts toward front 0 to 1 5 Level 1 control ON à it still tilts toward front 1 5 to 2 5 Level 2 control ON à the belt shifts toward the center Sensor state changes from 2 5 to 1 5 No controlling Sensor state changes from 1 5 to 0 No controlling 1 1 When passing the specified time after the value becomes 0 return the belt un...

Page 459: ...ance from the belt standard position 4 1 2 5 1 5 0 1 5 2 5 4 1 Belt position sensor 1 PS33 1 2 1 1 0 0 0 1 Belt position sensor 2 PS34 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 Belt position sensor 3 PS35 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 Tension roller HP sensor 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Sensor position áF áE áD áC áB áA á Displacement control motor Stop Clockw ise rotation Clockwi se rotation Stop Counter clockwis erotation Counter clockwis erotation Sto...

Page 460: ...Chapter 11 11 23 F 11 13 SEN3 SEN2 SEN1 SEN2 SEN3 SEN1 SEN2 SEN3 SEN1 ...

Page 461: ...P S Points to Note When Replacing Fixing Unit By executing the service mode the alarm code is closed and the total rotation time is cleared Thus this mode must be executed when replacing the fixing unit If the mode is not executed the following symptoms will occur The alarm code is not closed 06 0002 Fixing unit life alarm Caused by the belt displacement 06 0004 Fixing unit life alarm Caused by th...

Page 462: ...econds or more after moving the belt tension roller to two step position it is judged that the belt cannot be moved to the center and full displacement temporary escape mode is executed Perform pressure release of the pressure belt for the full displacement temporary escape mode While printing copying deliver papers at the machine first and perform this procedure When releasing pressure the belt i...

Page 463: ...fetime to urge replacement The message displayed when the fixing assembly reaches its lifetime is same as the one displayed on the control panel when executing the full displacement temporary escape mode There is an alarm code to distinguish the above two cases 06 0002 Fixing assembly belt lifetime alarm Occurred when belt displacement occurred 06 0004 Fixing assembly belt lifetime alarm Occurred ...

Page 464: ... rotate the drive roller hence the current amount voltage flown into the fixing motor also becomes higher Monitor this current amount V1 V2 É and when it reaches to the specified level warning level the warning message is displayed on the control panel As the fixing pressure belt is worn further the current amount reaches to the specified level error level and E008 0001 is displayed a message is a...

Page 465: ...000 hours at the total rotation time The total rotation time includes the total time of standby mode pressure belt detached and print mode pressure belt unit pressed The number of the paper that passed through the fixing unit can be checked from the service mode below However the count number shown by this service mode is not related to the life detection control Still though it is recommended to ...

Page 466: ... not closed 06 0002 Fixing unit life alarm Caused by the belt displacement 06 0004 Fixing unit life alarm Caused by the torque up Although the total rotation time of the replaced fixing assemble does not reach to the message threshold the machine wrongly recognize that it reaches to the threshold and displays the message Be sure not to execute the mode except at the installation and the fixing uni...

Page 467: ...lease motor M27 When fixing pressure release motor M27 rotates pressure belt is pressurized When rotated reversally the pressure is released It takes 3 seconds from driving the fixing pressure release motor M27 to change the pressure belt from released condition to pressurized condition or from pressurized condition to released condition The released pressurized condition of the pressure belt is d...

Page 468: ...achine is equipped with the following protective mechanisms to detect overheating of the fixing assembly thus cutting off the power to the heater 1 DC controller CPU 2 ASIC 3 thermal switch fixing thermal switch rated at 236 8 pressure thermal switch rated at 238 8 F 11 18 CPU IH drive circuit IH drive circuit ASIC DC CONTROLLER1 IH power supply circuit PCB AC driver circuit board PCB 3 2 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 469: ...ng Drive Unit 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 1 2 Remove the fixing drive cover 3 2 screws 2 F 11 19 3 Move the joint plate 2 to the side to detach 2 resin E rings 1 Use precision pliers F 11 20 4 Remove the harness guide cover 1 F 11 21 5 Disconnect the 4 connectors 1 F 11 22 2 1 3 B A 2 2 1 1 1 1 ...

Page 470: ...r Removing the Fixing Unit 1 Remove the fixing drive unit page 11 32 Reference Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 2 Remove the fixing assembly page 11 33 Reference Removing the Fixing Assembly 3 Remove the IH unit page 11 40 Reference Removing the IH Unit 11 5 3 2 Removing the Fixing Unit Points to Note When Removing the Fixing Unit Do not remove the screws that are locked with red bond If removing th...

Page 471: ...Chapter 11 11 34 F 11 26 F 11 27 1 Move the harness guide 3 2 connectors 1 2 screws 2 F 11 28 2 Remove the connector 1 F 11 29 2 1 2 3 1 2 ...

Page 472: ...tach it by freeing it from the pinÅj F 11 31 When moving the sensor unit take care not to remove the screws glued in place 5 Move the fixing belt position sensor unit 2 2 screws 1 F 11 32 Points to Note When Mounting the Sensor Flag Check to be sure that the sensor flag bar 2 is in contact with the edge of the belt 1 F 11 33 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 473: ...ft behind is the fixing unit service part 1 spring 1 4 screws 2 F 11 34 Points to Note When Mounting the Belt Displacement Control Motor Unit Be sure that tip of the arms of the 2 sensor flags 1 2 is positioned at the top A of the holder of the tensioners 3 4 F 11 35 1 2 2 3 1 2 3 A A 4 ...

Page 474: ... fixing unit 2 screws 1 F 11 36 2 Remove the protective cover 2 on the front side of the fixing unit 3 screws 1 F 11 37 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 The removed screws will be used during mounting work F 11 38 4 Remove the spring 1 The removed spring will be used during mounting work F 11 39 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 ...

Page 475: ...ed during mounting work F 11 42 8 Mount the fixing unit using the steps used to remove it but in reverse Points to Notes at Replacing Disposing the Fixing Unit The heat pipe is used at the upper belt of the fixing unit to even the heat at the rear front direction The heat pipe is a part that the small amount of liquid is vacuum encapsulated in the airtight container Thus do not throw the heat pipe...

Page 476: ...e gear 1 Apply approx one soybean size of grease to the end B of the gear 1 F 11 43 b Apply Grease to the Belt Displacement Control Motor Unit The portions to apply grease are as follows Apply approx one soybean size of grease to the end A of the gear 1 Apply approx one soybean size of grease to the center area B inside of the sheet metal 3 of the gear 2 Apply approx one soybean size of grease to ...

Page 477: ...ing unit comes to the end of its life 11 5 4 IH Unit 11 5 4 1 Preparation for Removing the IH Unit 1 Remove the fixing drive unit page 11 32 Reference Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 2 Remove the fixing assembly page 11 33 Reference Removing the Fixing Assembly 11 5 4 2 Removing the IH Unit 1 Remove the fixing front cover 3 1 screws stepped 1 1 screws 2 F 11 45 2 Remove the front drawer cover 2 1 s...

Page 478: ...on of the arrow A and free the cut off from the bearing then detach it in the direction of the arrow B F 11 51 Points to Note When Mounting the IH Unit Fit the cut off 1 of the IH unit with the bearing 2 F 11 52 Take care not to trap the felt extension A of the IH unit 1 in the gap between the IH unit and the fixing belt unit 2 making sure that the extension is on top of the belt unit F 11 53 1 1 ...

Page 479: ...ge 11 33 Reference Removing the Fixing Assembly 3 Remove the IH unit page 11 40 Reference Removing the IH Unit 11 5 5 2 Removing the Belt Displacement Control Motor Unit 1 Move the harness guide 3 2 connectors 1 2 screws 2 F 11 54 2 Remove the connector 1 F 11 55 3 Free the harness from the harness guide 2 2 connectors 1 F 11 56 4 Remove the harness guide 1 Move it to the side and detach it by fre...

Page 480: ...move the fixing belt position sensor unit 2 2 screws 1 F 11 58 Points to Note When Mounting the Sensor Unit Make sure that the sensor flag bar 2 is in contact with the edge of the fixing belt 1 F 11 59 6 Remove the belt displacement control motor unit 3 1 spring 1 4 screws 2 F 11 60 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 ...

Page 481: ... Remove the fixing drive unit page 11 32 Reference Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 2 Remove the fixing assembly page 11 33 Reference Removing the Fixing Assembly 11 5 6 2 Removing the Fixing Delivery Lower Unit 1 Remove the fixing delivery lower unit 4 1 harness guide cover 1 Open it 1 connector 2 1 screw 3 F 11 62 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Delivery Lower Unit Be sure to match the end...

Page 482: ...IH unit page 11 40 Reference Removing the IH Unit 4 Remove the fixing delivery lower unit page 11 44 Reference Removing the Fixing Delivery Lower Unit 11 5 7 2 Removing the Fixing Delivery Upper Unit 1 Remove the 2 connectors 1 and the 3 screws 2 F 11 64 2 Open the harness guide cover 1 of the rear drawer F 11 65 3 Remove the 2 connectors 1 F 11 66 4 Remove the rear drawer 3 2 connectors 1 to the ...

Page 483: ...he belt displacement control motor unit page 11 42 Reference Removing the Belt Displacement Control Motor Unit 11 5 8 2 Removing the Pressure Heater 1 Remove the pressure heater 3 3 screws 1 2 holders 2 of the pressure heater F 11 70 Points to Note When Mounting the Pressure Heater Be sure that the white wire is to the front of the machine and the black wire is to the rear 11 5 9 Fixing Inlet Lowe...

Page 484: ...ng the Fixing Inlet Lower Guide 11 5 10 2 Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor 1 Remove the sensor flag 3 of the fixing inlet sensor from the fixing inlet lower guide 1 E ring 1 1 shaft 2 Points to Note When Mounting the Sensor Flag Be sure that the spring 4 of the sensor is correctly mounted F 11 73 2 Remove the fixing inlet sensor 1 1 connector 2 F 11 74 11 5 11 Fixing Delivery Sensor 11 5 11 1 Prep...

Page 485: ...unit Move it away 4 screws 1 F 11 76 3 Remove the fixing delivery sensor 1 1 connector 2 F 11 77 11 5 12 Fixing Belt Position Sensor Unit 11 5 12 1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Belt Position Sensor Unit 1 Remove the fixing drive unit page 11 32 Reference Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 2 Remove the fixing assembly page 11 33 Reference Removing the Fixing Assembly 3 Remove the IH unit page 11...

Page 486: ...nsor unit 4 2 clamps 1 3 connectors 2 2 screws 3 F 11 80 Points to Note When Mounting the Sensor Unit Be sure that the sensor flag rod 2 is in contact with the edge of the fixing belt 1 F 11 81 When disconnecting the connector Be sure to match the color of the connector to the color indicated by the marking on the sensor mounting plate W being white 1 K being black 2 and B being blue 3 F 11 82 1 1...

Page 487: ...1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Wrap Sensor 1 Remove the fixing drive unit page 11 32 Reference Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 2 Remove the fixing assembly page 11 33 Reference Removing the Fixing Assembly 3 Remove the fixing delivery lower unit page 11 44 Reference Removing the Fixing Delivery Lower Unit 11 5 14 2 Removing the Fixing Wrap Sensor 1 Remove the rod shaped spring 1 connected to...

Page 488: ...emoving the Fixing Drive Unit 11 5 16 2 Removing the Fixing Pressure Motor Unit 1 Remove the fixing pressure motor unit 3 1 connector 1 3 screws 2 F 11 88 11 5 17 Fixing Belt Displacement Control Motor Unit 11 5 17 1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Belt Displacement Control Motor Unit 1 Remove the fixing drive unit page 11 32 Reference Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 2 Remove the fixing assembl...

Page 489: ... factory it will be difficult to adjust in the field if removing these parts 1 Move the pressure belt displacement control motor unit 4 in the direction of the arrow to detach the cover 3 1 E ring 1 1 screw 2 F 11 89 2 Along with the gear 1 and the 2 bearings 2 remove the pressure belt displacement control motor unit 4 from the shaft 3 F 11 90 3 From the shaft 4 of the fixing belt displacement con...

Page 490: ...essure Belt Displacement Control Motor Unit In the case of removing the pressure belt displacement control motor unit remove only the parts described in the following steps to remove Do not remove other parts such as the sensor and the flag Because the sensor position and the flag position are fine adjusted in the factory it will be difficult to adjust in the field if removing these parts 1 Move t...

Page 491: ...Chapter 12 EXTERNALS CONTROLS ...

Page 492: ... Supply Path in Printer 12 10 12 4 1 5 Power Supply Path in Pedestal Accessory 12 12 12 4 2 Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB 12 12 12 4 2 1 Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB 12 12 12 4 2 2 Rated Output of the Optional DC Power Supply PCB 12 13 12 4 3 Protection Function 12 14 12 4 3 1 Protective Mechanisms 12 14 12 4 4 Backup Battery 12 14 12 4 4 1 Battery for Backup 12 14 12 4 4 2 Backup Pow...

Page 493: ...2 5 23 Manual Feed Unit Open Closed Sensor 12 42 12 5 24 Front Cover Open Closed Sensor 12 43 12 5 25 Main Power Switch 12 45 12 5 26 Manual Feed Unit Open Closed Detecting Switch 12 46 12 5 27 Front Cover Open Closed Detecting Switch 12 48 12 5 28 ITB Cooling Fan 12 50 12 5 29 Face down Tray Cooling Fan rear front 12 51 12 5 30 Cleaner Fan 12 52 12 5 31 Manual Feed Cooling Fan 12 52 12 5 32 Fixin...

Page 494: ...r PCB sends data display information to the control panel CPU PCB as instructed by various programs 12 1 3 LCD Contras Adjustment The machine is equipped with a dial on its control panel designed for use by the user for adjustment of the LCD contrast 12 1 4 Functions of the Control Panel CPU Monitoring key inputs relays the inputs made by keypad keys and function keys to the CPU on the main contro...

Page 495: ...r mono color small Print full color mono color large Print full color mono color small disabled at default May be changed in service mode disabled at default May be changed in service mode 101 108 229 230 321 322 0 0 230V àÍîþ 3Åj Total 1 Total B W 1 Copy print full color large Copy print full color small Total mono color 1 totalÅidupl ex disabled at default May be changed in service mode disabled...

Page 496: ...de 101 122 123 112 113 501 0 0 230V GER 4Åj Total 1 total full color mono color large total full color mono color small total black and white large total black and white small scan total 1 disabled at default May be changed in service mode disabled at default May be changed in service mode 101 122 123 112 113 501 0 0 230V AMS 4 Åj total Åiblack and white largeÅj total black and white small total f...

Page 497: ...S6 face up delivery side tray fixing delivery sensor PS25 Finisher present finisher delivery sensor Symbol Name Function Other FM1 Power Supply Exhaust Fan 1 Exhaust heat in the power supply unit FM2 Fixing Exhaust Fan Exhaust heat in the fixing unit FM3 Main Body Exhaust Fan Exhaust heat in the main body FM4 Cleaner Fan Ease heat in the main body FM5 Delivery Cooling Fan Cool the paper being deli...

Page 498: ...Chapter 12 12 5 F 12 2 FM1 FM7 FM9 FM2 FM13 FM14 FM12 FM11 FM10 FM5 FM3 FM4 FM8 FM6 ...

Page 499: ...get in the sleep mode the LCD on the F 12 3 FM1 10 FM2 FM4 FM5 FM3 FM8 OFF FM6 FM7 IH Power Supply Cooling Fan FM9 FM13 ITB Cooling Fan FM11 FM12 13 13V 13V 24V 24V 13V 5 13V 1 13V 1 24 13V 3 24 13V 13V 1 5 13V 1 5 13V 13V 24V 24V 13V 24V 4 24V 13V 2 24 13V 2 24 13V 2 24V 24V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 24V 13V 24V 24V 13V 24V 24V 24V 12V ...

Page 500: ...Supply 12 4 1 1 Timing of Power Supply The reader unit is supplied with 24 VDC by the printer unit at the following timing of operation F 12 4 PSTBY DC 24V Main power switch turned ON Power plug connected to outlet Standby Power save mode Sleep mode ...

Page 501: ...pter 12 12 8 12 4 1 2 Wiring to Various Accessories The power supply connection between the printer and accessories is shown in the figure below F 12 5 DADF M1 PS Print Server Unit H1 Outlet1 Outlet2 Inlet ...

Page 502: ...3 3V for IC drive DC2 5V for IC drive DC15V for scanner motor drive DC24V for scanner motor drive The reader controller PCB generates the following DC voltages DC12V for CCD unit drive DC5V F 12 6 J301 J306 J601 J206 J309 J201 J312 J305 J204 J101 To ADF DC24V DC24V DC24V DC24V DC13V DC5V DC3 3V DC12V DC5V DC13V DC24V DC13V AC100 230V DC24V DC13V generation DC5V DC3 3V DC12V generation ...

Page 503: ...in power supply unit Main Power Supply PCB Generate DC voltage from AC voltage Overcurrent overvoltage protection Distribute DC power supply to each load DC DC Converter PCB 12V 5V 3 3V Generate 12V 5V and 3 3V from DC power supply 13V Overcurrent overvoltage protection Distribute DC power supply to each load DC DC Converter PCB 1 2 38V Generate 38V from DC power supply 24V Overcurrent overvoltage...

Page 504: ...PCB 2 MAISY DC DC Converter PCB 38V DDC DC Converter PCB 38V HVT1 HVT2G HVT1G_SUB HVT2G_SUB HVT3G HVT4G IH Drive PCB AC Driver PCB sw 13VB 13VA 24VA 24VB 13VB 24VB 13VA 24VA 24VA 38VB 24VA 3 3VA 24VA 24VA 13VA 5VA 24VA 13VA 5VA 5VA 24VA 24VA 13VA 13VA 3 3V_AN 5VB 12VB 5VB 12VB 13VB 3 3V_AN 3 3VA 24V 5VA 5V 5VA 38VB 24V 5V 13VA 5V 3 3V 12V 13V ...

Page 505: ...upply PCB 2 and optional sub power supply PCB Generate DC power supply from AC power supply Overcurrent overvoltage protection Distribute DC power supply to accessories paper deck finisher F 12 8 12 4 2 Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB 12 4 2 1 Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB 1 Rated Output of DC Power Supply of the Main Body T 12 4 Output Name 13VA 13VB ...

Page 506: ... Optional Power Supply PCB 1 2 T 12 8 Output Name 3 3VA 5VA 5VB 12VB All night Non all night All night Non all night All night Non all night All night Non all night Rated output 3 4 V 5 1V 12 0 V Tolerance 4 3 5 Output Name 38VA 38VB All night Non all night All night Non all night Rated output 38V Tolerance 10 Output Name 3 3VA All night Non all night All night Non all night Rated output 3 3V Tole...

Page 507: ...12 4 4 Backup Battery 12 4 4 1 Battery for Backup The SRAM PCB located at the main controller PCB and the DC controller PCB 1 IMG of this machine are equipped each 1 of lithium battery as a backup power supply for each data in the case when there is blackout or the power plug is disconnected Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt besteht Explosionsgefahr Gebrauchte Batterien gemas der Anleitung b...

Page 508: ...with all its parts supplied with power 2 Power Save Mode The term power save mode is used generically to refer to the following modes in which the machine is supplied with power differently than it is in normal mode power save low power sleep A shift in the direction of resent power save mode to low power mode and then to sleep mode occurs automatically Power Save Mode T 12 12 SRAM PCB manganese d...

Page 509: ...unit keeps the temperature of the fixing unit to a specific level 190 deg C which is lower than when the machine is in normal operating mode Shift A shift is made in response to the passage of time auto sleep shift time specified in user mode or in response to a press on the control panel software power switch Description In sleep mode 1 relatively higher power consumption the fixing assembly is t...

Page 510: ...w power mode Sleep mode 1 Sleep mode 2 AC OFF mode Main controller Non all night power 12V ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 5V ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 3 3V ON ON ON ON OFF OFF All night power 3 3VAN ON ON ON ON ON OFF 12VAN ON ON ON ON ON OFF Reader unit 24V ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Printer unit 24V ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 12V ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 5V ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 3 3V ON ON ON ON OFF OFF FAX Non all night power 5V...

Page 511: ...MP causes the operating system to collect machine status information at specific intervals preventing the machine from starting a sleep state To avoid the situation disable the setting Windows printer properties Disabling Use SNMP 1 Select Configure Port on the Ports screen printer properties F 12 9 ...

Page 512: ...Chapter 12 12 19 2 Remove the check mark from SNMP Status Enabled F 12 10 ...

Page 513: ...12 12 12 5 1 3 Right front cover 12 5 1 3 1 Removing the Right Front Cover 1 Slide out the manual feed unit and open the pickup vertical path cover 2 Remove the machine s front right cover 2 2 screws 1 F 12 13 12 5 1 4 Rear Right Cover 12 5 1 4 1 Removing of the Right Rear Cover 1 Pull the manual feeder unit and open the feeding vertical path cover The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lowe...

Page 514: ...oving the Left Lower Cover 1 Pull out the pickup cassette 1 2 Remove the left lower cover 3 4 screws 2 F 12 16 12 5 1 7 Upper Left Cover small 12 5 1 7 1 Removing the Card Reader Cover 1 Open the delivery vertical path cover 1 2 Remove the card reader cover 4 1 rubber cover 2 2 screws 3 F 12 17 12 5 1 8 Left Rear Cover Upper 12 5 1 8 1 Removing the Left Rear Cover Upper 1 Remove the left rear cove...

Page 515: ...21 Reference Removing the Left Lower Cover 3 Remove the left rear cover lower 2 2 screws 1 F 12 19 12 5 1 10 Rear Fan Cover 12 5 1 10 1 Removing the Rear Fan Cover 1 Remove the rear fan cover 1 3 screws 2 F 12 20 12 5 1 11 Rear Upper Cover 12 5 1 11 1 Removing the Rear Upper Cover 1 Remove the rear fan cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Fan Cover 2 Remove the rear upper cover 3 2 clamps ...

Page 516: ... upper page 12 21 Reference Removing the Left Rear Cover Upper 2 Remove the rear left cover upper 1 connector 1 2 screws 2 F 12 23 12 5 1 14 Inside Cover Upper 12 5 1 14 1 Removing the Inside Cover Upper 1 Remove the card reader cover page 12 21 Reference Removing the Card Reader Cover 2 Remove the front cover page 12 20 Reference Removing the Front Cover 3 Remove the toner receptacle releasing le...

Page 517: ... cover upper 2 5 screws 1 F 12 26 12 5 1 15 Inside Cover Lower 12 5 1 15 1 Removing the Inside Cover Lower 1 Remove the front cover page 12 20 Reference Removing the Front Cover 2 Remove the toner container 3 3 Remove the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever 2 1 screw 1 F 12 27 4 Remove the cleaner fan cover 2 1 screw 1 F 12 28 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 ...

Page 518: ... cable 2 clamps 1 2 connectors 2 F 12 30 2 Remove the reader controller communication cable 3 Remove the reader rear cover 2 5 screws 1 F 12 31 12 5 1 17 Manual Feeding Unit Cover 12 5 1 17 1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit Cover 1 Remove the manual feed unit 1 1 Press the release button 1 on the machine s right side to slide out the manual feed unit 2 F 12 32 1 2 2 2 2 3 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 ...

Page 519: ...the rear upper cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Upper Cover 3 Remove the rear left cover upper page 12 23 Reference Removing the Rear Left Cover Upper 4 Remove the main controller box cover 5 Remove the main controller box page 5 23 Reference Removing the Main Controller Box 6 Remove the DC controller PCB cover 7 Remove the DC controller box2 page 12 31 Reference Removing the DC Contro...

Page 520: ...ller Box 6 Remove the DC controller PCB cover 7 Remove the DC controller box2 page 12 31 Reference Removing the DC Controller Box2 8 Remove the DC controller box1 page 12 32 Reference Removing the DC Controller Box1 12 5 3 2 Removing the High Voltage Unit1 1 Remove the high voltage unit1 4 1 clamp 1 11 connectors 2 5 screws 3 Including 1 screw for the grounding wire F 12 37 12 5 3 3 Preparation fo...

Page 521: ...over page 12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Upper Cover 3 Remove the rear lower cover page 12 23 Reference Removing the Rear Lower Cover 4 Remove the left rear cover lower page 12 22 Reference Removing the Left Rear Cover Lower 12 5 4 2 Removing the Secondary Transfer Hign Voltage Unit 1 With the fan pull out the secondary transfer high voltage unit 4 1 screw 3 3 connectors 2 2 clamps 1 F 12 39 2 ...

Page 522: ...aration for Removing the DC Power Supply Unit 1 Remove the rear fan cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Fan Cover 2 Remove the rear upper cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Upper Cover 3 Remove the rear lower cover page 12 23 Reference Removing the Rear Lower Cover 4 Remove the left rear cover lower page 12 22 Reference Removing the Left Rear Cover Lower 5 Remove the IH power su...

Page 523: ...ol Panel LCD Unit 12 5 8 1 Preparation for Removing the Control Panel LCD Unit 1 Remove the card reader cover page 12 21 Reference Removing the Card Reader Cover 2 Remove the front cover page 12 20 Reference Removing the Front Cover 3 Remove the control panel 2 toward the front Referring to procedure 12 5 7 4 Remove the control panel 2 Referring to procedure 12 5 7 5 Remove the control panel back ...

Page 524: ...e 12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Fan Cover 2 Remove the rear upper cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Upper Cover 12 5 9 2 Removing the DC Controller Box2 1 Remove the DC controller PCB cover 2 8 screws 1 F 12 48 2 Remove the connectors the clamps and the flat cable on the DC controller box 18 connectors 6 clamps 1 1 flat cable 2 F 12 49 3 Remove the DC controller box 2 2 9 screws 1 F...

Page 525: ... DC Controller PCB2 MAISY 1 Remove the rear fan cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Fan Cover 2 Remove the rear upper cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Upper Cover 3 Remove the DC controller box2 page 12 31 Reference Removing the DC Controller Box2 12 5 10 2 Removing the DC Controller PCB2 MAISY 1 Remove the DC controller PCB2 DCCON MAISY 8 screws 1 F 12 53 12 5 10 3 Preparatio...

Page 526: ... value for the manual feed tray 3 Turn off and then on the main power switch 4 Select the following in service mode COPIER FUNCTION LASER L ADJ 0 5 Press the OK key The machine starts auto adjustment and will indicate END at its end 12 5 11 Main Power Supply PCB 12 5 11 1 Preparation for Removing the Main Power Supply PCB 1 Remove the rear fan cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Fan Cover...

Page 527: ...Power Supply Unit 4 Remove the DC power supply unit page 12 29 Reference Removing the DC Power Supply Unit 12 5 12 2 Removing the All night Power Supply PCB 1 Remove the DC power supply unit cover 2 7 screws 1 F 12 57 2 Remove the night light power supply PCB 3 5 connectors 1 4 screws 2 F 12 58 12 5 13 IH Power Supply PCB 12 5 13 1 Preparation for Removing the IH Power Supply PCB 1 Remove the IH p...

Page 528: ...ce Removing the DC Power Supply Unit 12 5 14 2 Removing the Leakage Breaker 1 Remove the leak breaker unit 4 1 clamp 1 2 connectors 2 3 screws 3 F 12 61 2 Remove the leak breaker 4 2 screws 1 1 clamp 2 4 connectors 3 F 12 62 12 5 15 Relay PCB 12 5 15 1 Preparation for Removing the Relay PCB 1 Remove the rear fan cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Fan Cover 2 Remove the rear lower cover p...

Page 529: ...ower Supply Unit 4 Remove the DC power supply unit page 12 29 Reference Removing the DC Power Supply Unit 12 5 16 2 Removing the DC DC Converter PCB 38V 1 1 Remove the DC power supply unit cover 2 Referring to procedure 12 5 12 2 2 Remove the DC DC converter PCB 38V 1 3 2 connectors 1 4 screws 2 F 12 64 12 5 16 3 Preparation for Removing the DC DC Converter PCB 38V 2 1 Remove the rear fan cover pa...

Page 530: ... the DC Power Supply Unit 5 Remove the main power supply PCB page 12 33 Reference Removing the Main Power Supply PCB 12 5 16 6 Removing the DC DC Converter PCB 3 3V 5V 12V 1 Remove the DC DC converter PCB 3 3V 5V 12V 3 3 connectors 1 4 screws 2 F 12 66 12 5 17 AC Driver PCB 12 5 17 1 Preparation for Removing the AC Driver PCB 1 Remove the rear fan cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Fan C...

Page 531: ...eference Removing the DC Controller Box2 7 Remove the DC controller box 1 page 12 32 Reference Removing the DC Controller Box1 8 Remove the high voltage unit 1 page 12 27 Reference Removing the High Voltage Unit1 12 5 18 2 Removing the Relay PCB 1 1 Remove elay PCB mount base 3 19 connectors 7 clamps 1 free the harness 4 screws 2 F 12 68 2 Remove the relay PCB 2 10 screws 1 F 12 69 12 5 19 Control...

Page 532: ...l Panel Key Switch PCB 12 5 20 1 Preparation for Removing the Control Panel Key Switch PCB 1 Remove the card reader cover page 12 21 Reference Removing the Card Reader Cover 2 Remove the front cover page 12 20 Reference Removing the Front Cover 3 Remove the control panel 2 toward the front 4 screws 1 F 12 73 4 Remove the control panel 2 1 connector 1 F 12 74 2 1 1 2 2 1 ...

Page 533: ... the control panel key switch PCB 2 7 screws 1 F 12 76 12 5 21 Control Panel Inverter PCB 12 5 21 1 Preparation for Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB 1 Remove the card reader cover page 12 21 Reference Removing the Card Reader Cover 2 Remove the front cover page 12 20 Reference Removing the Front Cover 3 Remove the control panel 2 toward the front 4 screws 1 F 12 77 4 Remove the control pane...

Page 534: ...ronment Sensor 1 Pressure release of the intermediate transfer unit 1 1 Open the front cover and turn the intermediate transfer unit pressure release lever to release it 1 2 Slide the manual feeding unit out 1 3 Remove the right middle cover 2 1 screw 1 F 12 79 1 4 Release the escape lever 1 and fix with the tape 2 etc When the pressure release lever is not fixed release lever may drop and damage ...

Page 535: ...vironment sensor 2 1 connector 1 F 12 83 12 5 23 Manual Feed Unit Open Closed Sensor 12 5 23 1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Feed Unit Open Closed Sensor 1 Remove the rear fan cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Fan Cover 2 Remove the rear upper cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Upper Cover 3 Remove the DC controller PCB cover 4 Remove the DC controller box2 page 12 31 Re...

Page 536: ...ve the control panel page 12 30 Reference Removing the Control Panel 2 Remove the inside cover upper page 12 23 Reference Removing the Inside Cover Upper 3 Remove the rear upper cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Upper Cover 4 Remove the rear lower cover page 12 23 Reference Removing the Rear Lower Cover 5 Remove the left rear cover upper page 12 21 Reference Removing the Left Rear Cover...

Page 537: ...l connectors from the PCB and free all harnesses from the cable clamps then remove the 7 screws 1 and remove the DC controller PCB 2 together with its base F 12 88 12 5 24 2 Removing the Front Cover Open Closed Sensor 1 Remove the sensor flag retaining plate 2 found at the front 1 screw 1 F 12 89 2 Pull out the sensor mounting plate 3 The sensor flag retaining plate is found between the front side...

Page 538: ... 2 connectors 1 3 screws 2 F 12 92 12 5 25 Main Power Switch 12 5 25 1 Preparation for Removing the Main Power Switch 1 With the manual feeder unit 1 pulled out remove the rear right cover 3 3 screws 2 F 12 93 12 5 25 2 Removing the Main Power Switch 1 Remove the mounting plate 2 5 screws 1 F 12 94 2 1 3 1 3 1 ...

Page 539: ...r cover page 12 23 Reference Removing the Rear Lower Cover 3 Remove the left rear cover upper page 12 21 Reference Removing the Left Rear Cover Upper 4 Remove the controller box cover 4 1 Remove the main controller cover 4 1 connector J1512 1 from the power distribution PCB harness from the wire saddle 2 6 screws 3 F 12 96 5 Remove the DC controller PCB cover 2 Referring to procedure 12 5 24 1 6 O...

Page 540: ...ain controller box F 12 98 F 12 99 6 3 Remove the controller box from the hook A B at the top of the main controller box F 12 100 6 4 Engage the hook 1 found on the right side of the main controller box on the stay 2 of the machine and open it F 12 101 ...

Page 541: ...ing the Front Cover Open Close Switch 1 Remove the control panel page 12 30 Reference Removing the Control Panel 2 Remove the inside cover upper page 12 23 Reference Removing the Inside Cover Upper 3 Remove the rear upper cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Upper Cover 4 Remove the rear lower cover page 12 23 Reference Removing the Rear Lower Cover 5 Remove the left rear cover upper page ...

Page 542: ...r 3 while pulling the manual feeder feeding unit 1 3 screws 2 F 12 106 2 Remove the sensor flag pressure plate 2 on the front side 1 screw 1 F 12 107 3 Pull the sensor mount 3 Sensor flag pressure plate is located from the end plate front to the end plate rear 2 connectors 1 2 screws 2 F 12 108 2 1 3 1 1 2 3 ...

Page 543: ...2 Remove the cleaner fan cover 2 1 screw 1 F 12 110 3 Remove the inside cover lower side page 12 24 Reference Removing the Inside Cover Lower 12 5 28 2 Removing the ITB Cooling Fan 1 From the back of lower inside cover remove ITB fan cover 2 screws 1 F 12 111 2 Remove ITB fan 2 1 connector 1 F 12 112 12 5 28 3 Removing the ITB Cooling Fan Filter 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove ITB fan filter 2 1 s...

Page 544: ...oling Fan Unit 1 Remove the face down tray fan unit 3 1 connector 1 2 screws 2 F 12 114 12 5 29 3 Preparation for Removing the Face Down Tray Cooling Fan 1 Remove the face down tray cooling fan unit page 12 51 Reference Removing the Face Down Tray Cooling Fan Unit 12 5 29 4 Removing the Face Down Tray Cooling Fan There are 2 face down tray fans side by side in the vicinity Removing procedure is th...

Page 545: ...116 12 5 30 2 Removing the Cleaner Fan 1 Remove the connector 1 and free the 3 claws then remove the cleaner fan 2 F 12 117 12 5 31 Manual Feed Cooling Fan 12 5 31 1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Feed Cooling Fan 1 Remove the right rear cover page 12 20 Reference Removing of the Right Rear Cover 2 Remove the switch and the sheet metal around the fan 5 screws 1 F 12 118 1 2 1 A 2 A 1 3 1 ...

Page 546: ... left rear cover upper side page 12 21 Reference Removing the Left Rear Cover Upper 4 Remove the left rear cover lower side page 12 22 Reference Removing the Left Rear Cover Lower 5 Remove the rear left cover upper side page 12 23 Reference Removing the Rear Left Cover Upper 12 5 32 2 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan 1 Remove 4 claws A and remove the filter unit 1 Points to Note When Removin...

Page 547: ...r cover page 12 23 Reference Removing the Rear Lower Cover 3 Remove the IH power supply unit page 12 29 Reference Removing the IH Power Supply Unit 4 Remove the DC power supply unit page 12 29 Reference Removing the DC Power Supply Unit 12 5 33 2 Removing the Power Supply Exhaust Fan 1 1 Remove the power supply exhaust fan cover 2 1 screw 1 F 12 123 2 Remove the power supply exhaust fan 1 3 1 conn...

Page 548: ... cover page 12 22 Reference Removing the Rear Upper Cover 3 Remove the rear lower cover page 12 23 Reference Removing the Rear Lower Cover 4 Remove the left rear cover lower side page 12 22 Reference Removing the Left Rear Cover Lower 5 Remove the secondary transfer high voltage unit page 12 28 Reference Removing the Secondary Transfer Hign Voltage Unit 12 5 35 2 Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan ...

Page 549: ...e Delivery Vertical Path Cooling Fan 1 Remove the upper left cover page 12 21 Reference Removing the Upper Left Cover 2 Remove the delivery vertical path cover page 10 94 Reference Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Cover 3 Remove the delivery vertical path unit page 10 93 Reference Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit 12 5 37 2 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Cooling Fan 1 Remove fan duc...

Page 550: ...r Upper Cover 3 Remove the left rear cover upper page 12 21 Reference Removing the Left Rear Cover Upper 4 Remove the rear left cover upper page 12 23 Reference Removing the Rear Left Cover Upper 12 5 38 2 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Exhaust Fan 1 Remove fan duct 2 2 screws 1 F 12 132 2 Remove the exhaust vertical path exhaust fan 3 1 connector 1 2 screws 2 F 12 133 MEMO The delivery verti...

Page 551: ...e Unit 5 Remove the lattice connector mount 4 2 clamps 1 2 screws 2 6 connectors 3 F 12 134 6 Remove the high voltage unit 2 page 12 28 Reference Removing the High Voltage Unit 2 7 Remove drum ITB motor base 3 2 connectors 1 3 screws 2 F 12 135 Points to Note When Removing the Drum ITB Motor Mounting To remove put your hand into the inside where you have slid out the manual feed unit then while ho...

Page 552: ...ing used to secure the belt tension plate in place The plate is used to maintain a specific degree of tension on the belt F 12 138 1 Remove the belt tension pulley cover 3 2 positions on the right and left sides 4 clamps 1 4 screws 2 F 12 139 2 Remove the drum unit drive belt 2 the belt retaining roll 1 found on the right side F 12 140 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 3 3 1 2 ...

Page 553: ...Chapter 13 MEAP ...

Page 554: ...Contents Contents 13 1 MEAP 13 1 13 1 1 Overview 13 1 13 1 2 MEAP Counter 13 1 13 1 3 Construction of the MEAP Platform 13 2 ...

Page 555: ... as how often they are used for individual MEAP applications that are installed The MEAP counter readings may be checked by making the following selections on the device control panel Counter Check Key MEAP Counter Check A device may possess the following MEAP counters and which counter to use and therefore to display all depend on the application in question A counter reading may be of a type tha...

Page 556: ...device It is important that the version of the system software be fully compatible with the version of the MEAP content calling for special care In the case of a mismatch the device will not be able to run the MEAP application For version information refer to the Service Information bulletin that is released in conjunction with the system software The following shows the components of a MEAP appli...

Page 557: ...Chapter 14 RDS ...

Page 558: ...4 1 14 1 4 Communication log 14 1 14 1 5 Detailed Communication log 14 1 14 1 6 SOAP communication function 14 1 14 1 7 Resend at SOAP transmission error 14 2 14 1 8 e RDS setting screen 14 3 14 1 9 Sleep operation 14 5 14 1 10 Network Setting Maintenance 14 5 14 1 11 e RDS Setting Maintenance 14 6 14 1 12 Trouble shoot 14 7 14 1 13 Error message 14 7 ...

Page 559: ...munication error 14 1 4 Communication log The list of the log of the communication error proxy server error etc For 30 can be displayed in display panel in the service mode Menu Screen COM LOG 14 1 5 Detailed Communication log Detailed information of the error in the communication log can be displayed in display panel Log List Screen Each error 14 1 6 SOAP communication function The following proc...

Page 560: ...ged by the instruction from UGW List of Transmissions 14 1 7 Resend at SOAP transmission error When SOAP send error is generated by the trouble on UGW side etc at the transmission of an alert code the latest three batches of data that failed in the transmission are stored in HDD and e RDS resends it at prescribed intervals Content of transmission Transmission timing Communication test When Service...

Page 561: ...he initial value of each setting item are as follows Item meaning Explanation E RDS Embedded RDS Turning OFF ON e RDS 0 OFF 1 ON Counter information and error information are transmitted to the host at ON Initial value 0 OFF RGW ADR RDS Gateway ADDRESS URL of the host When the input area is selected touched shift to the keyboard screen Initial value URL of an actual host Length 129 characters NULL...

Page 562: ...ximum log number 30 Notes Only the first part of error information is displayed COM TEST Communication Test Execution of Communication test Communication test starts when you select touch this and press the OK key e RDS tries the connection with the host and displays the result by OK or NG NG No Good the communication test is failed COM LOG Communication Log The result of communication test When t...

Page 563: ...ing of Device appropriately before the e RDS setting A Display the Additional Functions screen Press Additional Functions key Input ID code B Display the TCP IP Settings screen Select touch System Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings on the Touch Panel Display C Setting of items related to IP address Select touch IP Address Settings IP Address Settings screen is displayed Set each items such ...

Page 564: ...ional Functions key SERVICE MODE LEVEL1 A 2 Initialize e RDS Select touch COPIER Function CLEAR ERDS DAT on the Touch Panel Display A 3 Display Menu screen of e RDS Select touch COPIER Function INSTALL Menu screen F 14 4 B Set 1 in E RDS C Input the URL of UGW in RGW ADR Select the input area to shift to the keyboard screen and Input URL D Input the port number of UGW in RGW PORT E Select COM TEST...

Page 565: ...ecified following string is displayed Event Registration is Failed In other cases error information is displayed in the form of the following Error string Method name Server side detailed error The enclosed character string by is replaced as follows asterisk is added to the head of the string only at the communication test Error string As for number 1 and 2 of the following Error string lists only...

Page 566: ...e server The date of the device is outside the time limit of the certificate Register the root certificate in expiration date in the device or register the VeriSign certificate in the server Set an accurate date to the device 10 Unknown error Other communication error occurs After waiting for a while try again 11 Server response error NULL UGW returns the error but communication to UGW is succeede...

Page 567: ...e Check and correct the URL of UGW 17 E RDS switch is set OFF You execute the communication test while the E RDS switch is OFF Turn ON E RDS switch and execute the communication test 18 Server schedule is not exist The e RDS receives empty schedule data from UGW Check setting file Call the help desk of UGW 19 Network is not ready try later You execute the communication when the connection to the n...

Page 568: ... acquisition phase 4 postFirmwareInfo ROM version acquisition phase 5 getOperationList Check acquisition phase whether the information file for me is in UGW 6 postOperationOutcome 7 postConfiguration Phase in which E RDS configuration is transmitted to UGW 8 postGlobalClickCount Counter acquisition phase 9 postJamLog Jam notification acquisition phase 10 postServiceCallLog Error notification acqui...

Page 569: ...Chapter 15 MAINTENANCE INSPECTION ...

Page 570: ...15 1 15 1 3 Printer Unit 15 1 15 2 Durables and Consumables 15 2 15 2 1 Outline 15 2 15 2 2 Reader Unit 15 2 15 2 3 Printer Unit 15 2 15 3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure 15 4 15 3 1 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure 15 4 15 3 2 Scheduled Servicing Reader Unit 15 5 15 3 3 Scheduled Servicing Printer Unit 15 6 ...

Page 571: ...ervicing The guide to periodical replacement is subject to change according to the site of installation and habits of use 15 1 2 Reader Unit The reader unit does not have parts that require periodical replacement 15 1 3 Printer Unit T 15 1 F 15 1 MEMO The estimated life is in terms of the median value found in the evaluation data The parts number further is subject to change to reflect design chan...

Page 572: ...ner Box FM2 5383 1 50 000 Average Monthly CV is more than 5000 prints at 5 image ratio and 10 to 60 color image ratio This value may be lower if Average Monthly CV is less than 5000 prints or excessively high 2 Intermediate Transfer Belt FC7 0091 1 300 000 3 Drive Roller FC7 2747 1 300 000 4 Primary Transfer Roller FC7 4811 4 300 000 5 Secondary Transfer Roller FB6 2934 1 300 000 6 Secondary Trans...

Page 573: ...apter 15 15 3 MEMO The estimated life is in terms of the median value found in the evaluation data The parts number further is subject to change to reflect design changes F 15 2 11 12 8 4 9 5 6 7 3 1 2 10 ...

Page 574: ...Record the counter reading Check the faulty prints 3 Make test prints 1 check the image density against standards 2 check for soiling in the white background 3 check the clarity of characters 4 check the margin 5 check the fixing check for poor registration and soiling on the back Standards on margin single sided leading edge 2 5 mm 1 5 mm trailing edge 2 5 mm 1 5 mm left 2 0 mm 1 5 mm 4 Waste Ton...

Page 575: ...reciable Copyboard glassÅiInside and outside sideÅj clean if dirt is appreciable No 1 through No 3 mirrors clean if dirt is appreciable Original reflecting plate clean if dirt is appreciable Original size sensor clean if dirt is appreciable Lens clean if dirt is appreciable ADF reader glassÅiInside and outside sideÅj clean if dirt is appreciable Scanning lamp Dry wipe with lint free paper Lens Use...

Page 576: ...let guide clean if dirt is appreciable Fixing inlet roll clean if dirt is appreciable Delivery upper guide clean if dirt is appreciable Delivery lower guide clean if dirt is appreciable Manual feed registration unit Pre registration roller clean if dirt is appreciable Registration upper roller clean if dirt is appreciable Registration lower roller clean if dirt is appreciable Pickup vertical path ...

Page 577: ...t guide Dry wipe with lint free paper Face down delivery roller 1 Intermediate transfer belt Face down delivery roller 2 External delivery roller Internal delivery roller Duplex feed roller Duplex feed roller Secondary transfer rear guide Duplex feed roller Registration lower roller Registration upper roller Duplex feed roller Pickup vertical path roller Pre registration roller Reversing roller Re...

Page 578: ...Chapter 16 STANDARDS ADJUSTMENTS ...

Page 579: ...stem 16 8 16 4 1 Laser maker identification 16 8 16 4 2 After Replacing the Transfer Unit 16 8 16 4 3 After Replacing the Pattern Reading Unit 16 8 16 4 4 Adjustments of Tilt in Intermediate Transfer Unit Rail 16 8 16 5 Fixing System 16 11 16 5 1 Treatment after Replacement of Fixing Unit 16 11 16 6 Electrical Components 16 13 16 6 1 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB or Initializing the RA...

Page 580: ... CCD read start cell position adjustment 4 leading edge non image width adjustment scanner image leading edge position adjustment Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Margin 1 Select the following in service mode and see that the image margin is as indicated COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REGIST F 16 5 2 5 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 0 2nd side of double sided copy 2 5 2 0mm 2 5 1 5mm 10 8 6 5 4 2 0 2 0 1 5mm 2nd...

Page 581: ...2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and remove the right front cover 2 F 16 8 3 Remove the grip 1 found at the right front If only the cassette 2 F 16 9 Image leading edge Decrease the value of ADJ X A decrease of 10 will decrease the non image width by 1 mm Increase the value of ADJ X An increase of 10 will increase the non image width by 1 mm 2 5 4 6 8 101214161820 0 2 5 1 5mm 2nd side of double sided copy ...

Page 582: ...setting to adjust A change of 1 will cause a move of 0 1 mm and a higher value will move the image toward the leading edge F 16 12 Adjusting the Image Area non image width 1 Select the following in service mode COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK T L B R 2 Change the setting to adjust An increase by 24 increases the non image width by about 1mm with the range of settings being between 0 and 100 Image L2 Dec...

Page 583: ... After Replacing the CCD Unit If you have replaced the CCD unit be sure to enter the settings indicated on the label attached to the CCD unit COPIER ADJUST CCD CCDU RG to enter the correction value for CCD dependent RG color displacement in sub scanning direction COPIER ADJUST CCD CCDU GB to enter the correction value for CCD dependent GB color displacement in sub scanning direction F 16 15 Moreov...

Page 584: ...1 Using the SST download the latest version of the system software R CON 2 Select the following in service mode and press the OK key to initialize the RAM COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR R CON Thereafter turn off and then on the main power 3 Enter the settings for the following items in service mode 1 standard white plate white level data COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT X Y Z F 16 17 2 service label settings label ...

Page 585: ...PIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL1 COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL2 When done store the P PRINT printout 1 you have previously generated in the service book disposing of the older printout if any 4 Adjustment of ADF stream reading Make this adjustment only for the machine with ADF attached 1 Make a sheet of paper 1 for adjustment of the scanning position using the paper white paper used by users following the...

Page 586: ...t the position more than 15mm away from the right edge of the paper made in Procedure with a black pencil Right angle accuracy Not required Right angle accuracy does not affect the adjustment accuracy áDraw a straight line at the position 14mm away from the line drawn in Procedure áA to the left direction tolerance or 0 3 with a black pencil F 16 20 2 Adjust the line 1 to the line between the shee...

Page 587: ...t secondary transfer unit 16 4 3 After Replacing the Pattern Reading Unit There is no particular work to perform after replacing the pattern reading unit 16 4 4 Adjustments of Tilt in Intermediate Transfer Unit Rail In this machine displacement of the intermediate transfer belt to one side infrequently causes a tear in the belt In the machine where a tear occurs in the intermediate transfer belt a...

Page 588: ...following the reverse procedures 4 Turn on the main power switch 5 Execute User Mode Adjustment Cleaning Main Unit Cleaning 6 After executing cleaning remove the intermediate transfer unit again and measure the distance C between the edge A and the ITB member B When the distance C is larger or smaller than 14mm make an adjustment following the procedures shown below Be sure to keep the intermediat...

Page 589: ...diate transfer unit release lever 2 F 16 28 6 5 Remove the connector 1 and the four screws 2 and detach the inner cover 3 6 6 Loosen the two bind screws 1 F 16 29 6 7 Release the open close lever 1 and open the drum unit cover 2 F 16 30 6 8 Loosen the one bind screw 1 6 9 Loosen the two RS screws 1 F 16 31 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 590: ...rder to equalize the heat of the rear front direction The heat pipe is enclosing a little amount of liquid in vacuum in an airtight container Thus do not throw the heat pipe in the fire because it will burst When discarding the fixing unit be sure to shred 1 1 Applying Grease to Fixing Drive Unit Belt Displacement Control Motor Unit When replacing the fixing unit apply the super lube grease standa...

Page 591: ...nd pressure belt HP search operation COPIER FUNCTION FIXING FX UHP S COPIER FUNCTION FIXING FX LHP S Points to Note When Replacing Fixing Unit By executing the service mode the alarm code is closed and the total rotation time is cleared Thus this mode must be executed when replacing the fixing unit If the mode is not executed the following symptoms will occur The alarm code is not closed 06 0002 F...

Page 592: ... reading COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ S d feeder mode main scanning position adjustment COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ Y DF e ADF stream reading CCD read position adjustment COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY STRD POS f CCD unit dependent RB GB sub scanning direction color displacement correction value COPIER ADJUST CCD CCDU RG GB g CCD unit dependent RG GB sub scanning direction color displacement value at shipment COPI...

Page 593: ...ition 14mm away from the line drawn in Procedure áA to the left direction tolerance or 0 3 with a black pencil F 16 37 2 Adjust the line 1 to the line between the sheet 2 and the mold 3 and fix the paper at one position with the cellophane tape 4 Accuracy of attaching the measurement sheet or 0 3mm F 16 38 3 Execute the Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL STPD POS 16 6 2 Replacing DC Controller P...

Page 594: ...e PCB will be initialized and be rendered useless for machine A or B Take full care 1 When you turn on the power after replacing the SRAM PCB the machine will perform automatic initialization and will indicate a message on its panel to the effect that you are to turn off and then on the power switch found on its right side Follow the message and turn off and then on the machine 2 Using service mod...

Page 595: ...rrectly been downloaded on the screen brought up by making the following selections user mode system control settings group ID control Only the downloaded ID data must be indicated 5 Make copies using a user card registered with NSA and check that statistical operations are made for the device in question 16 6 6 When Replacing the Power Supply PCB There is no particular work to perform after repla...

Page 596: ...g service mode to adjust COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ REFE 16 7 2 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Duplex Unit After replacing the horizontal registration motor horizontal registration sensor duplex unit and fixing delivery unit follow the adjustment showing below COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ REFE Image L2 will decrease the margin on the front side of the paper Moving the adjus...

Page 597: ...Chapter 17 CORRECTING FAULTY IMAGES ...

Page 598: ... Contents 17 1 Outline of Electrical Components 17 1 17 1 1 Clutch Solenoid 17 1 17 1 2 Motor 17 1 17 1 3 Fan 17 5 17 1 4 Sensor 17 6 17 1 5 Switch 17 11 17 1 6 Lamps Heaters and Others 17 13 17 1 7 PCBs 17 15 ...

Page 599: ...for double sided printing FH6 5052 CL 2 J119 SL1 manual feed pickup solenoid controls the timing of pickup for the manual feed block FK2 0115 SL 1 J120 SL2 delivery path switching solenoid 1 switches over positions of the delivery tray FH6 5056 SL 2 J717A SL3 cassette 1 pickup solenoid controls the timing of pickup from the cassette 1 FK2 0408 SL 3 J117A SL4 cassette 2 pickup solenoid controls the...

Page 600: ...ckup motor drives the pickup unit 1 FK2 2515 MTR 6 DCON2 J118B M7 cassette 2 pickup motor drives the pickup unit 2 FK2 2515 MTR 7 DCON2 J118A M8 pre registration motor drives the registration roller FK2 2519 MTR 12 DCON2 J120A M9 registration motor drives the pre registration roller FK2 2516 MTR 11 DCON2 J120B M10 delivery vertical path motor drives the delivery vertical path roller 2 FK2 2515 MTR...

Page 601: ... toner inside the toner container C FK2 2525 MTR 4 relay PCB J706 M23 toner container motor Bk stirs toner inside the toner container Bk FK2 2525 MTR 5 relay PCB J706 M24 fixing drive motor drives the fixing unit FK2 2514 DCON2 J109B M25 horizontalregistration motor matches the horizontal registration position for paper FK2 0144 MTR 16 DCON2 J119B M26 duplex feeder motor moves paper to the duplex ...

Page 602: ...Chapter 17 17 4 F 17 2 M25 M8 M9 M1 M6 M7 M5 M4 M3 M2 M26 M19 M18 M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M23 M24 M29 M28 M27 M22 M21 M20 M11 M10 ...

Page 603: ...livery FK2 0124 FAN 5 relay PCB J712 FM6 manual feed cooling fan cools paper for manual feeding FK2 2530 FAN 6 DCON2 J118A FM7 controller fan cools the inside of the controller box FK2 2529 MNCOM J1007 FM8 delivery vertical path cooling fan cools the IH power supply assembly FH6 1984 FAN 7 relay PCB J707 FM9 IH power supply cooling fan exhaust heat from the power supply assembly FK2 2530 DCON2 J11...

Page 604: ...RCON PS501 scanner HP sensor detects the home position of the scanner FK2 0149 J310 J308 J202 PS502 ADF open close senor 1 detects the state open closed of the ADF FK2 0149 J310 J307 J203 PS503 ADF open close sensor 2 detects and screens detection timing of the original size recognition FK2 0149 J310 J308 J202 FM1 FM7 FM9 FM2 FM13 FM14 FM12 FM11 FM10 FM5 FM3 FM4 FM8 FM6 ...

Page 605: ...2 relay PCB J708 PS4 toner feedscrew rotation sensor Bk detects the rotation of the feedscrew inside the toner container Bk FH7 7312 relay PCB J708 PS5 fixing feeder unit open closed Sensor detects the sate open closed of the fixing feeder unit FH7 7312 P005 4 relay PCB J717A PS6 face down delivery sensor 2 detects the passage of paper in the face down delivery assembly FH7 7312 P007 8 relay PCB J...

Page 606: ...ON2 J117B PS18 cassette 2 paper level sensor B detects the level of paper inside the cassette 2 B FH7 7312 P001 11 DCON2 J117B PS19 cassette 2 paper sensor detects the presence absence of paper inside the cassette 2 FH7 7312 P001 13 DCON2 J117B PS20 cassette 2 paper level sensor A detects the level of paper inside the cassette 2 A FH7 7312 P001 10 DCON2 J117B PS21 duplex registration sensor detect...

Page 607: ...pressure FH7 7312 DCON2 J108B PS47 fixing loop sensor detects fixing loop FH7 7312 DCON2 J119B PS50 Fixing feed unit open close sensor detects if the fixing feed unit is open or closed FH7 7312 relay PCB J719 VR1 slide resistor detects the width of paper for manual feed FH7 7600 DCON2 J120A OHP1 transparency sensor front detects a transparency RH7 7129 P007 10 DCON2 J120B OHP2 transparency sensor ...

Page 608: ...he pressure belt FK2 2507 DCON2 J108B TPS1 SALT sensor stabilizes development characteristics SALT FK2 2510 DCON2 J112A TS1 ATR sensor Y executes automatic toner density correction ATR Y MG4 0246 DCON2 J110 TS2 ATR sensor M executes automatic toner density correction ATR M MG4 0246 DCON2 J110 TS3 ATR sensor C executes automatic toner density correction ATR C MG4 0246 DCON2 J110 TS4 ATR sensor Bk e...

Page 609: ...r iR C4080 Color Image Reader F1 Color Image Reader E1 Duplex Color Image Reader G1 The reader unit does not have switches PS9 VR1 PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 EV1 TS4 TS3 TS2 TS1 PS50 TH5 TH2 TH1 TH4 TP1 TP3 TH3 TH6 PS6 PS8 PS5 PS10 PS26 OHP1 OHP2 PS25 PS29 PS30 PS33 PS35 PS34 PS22 PS21 PS46 PS36 PS37 PS38 PS27 PS47 PS7 PS16 PS14 PS15 PS20 PS19 PS17 PS18 PS13 PS12 PS11 PS24 PS23 PS28 PS31 TPS1 ...

Page 610: ...e state open closed of the front Cover RH7 6037 relay PCB J624 MSW2 front cover open closed detection switch 2 detects the state open closed of the front Cover RH7 6037 MSW3 manual feed unit open closed detection switch 1 detects the state open closed of the manual feed unit RH7 6037 MSW4 manual feed unit open closed detection switch 2 detects the state open closed of the manual feed unit RH7 6037...

Page 611: ...ntion heater 1 prevents condensation on a lens FK2 0226 100V FK2 0228 230V J2301M J651A J631A Notatio n Name Description Parts No E Code Jack No H1 pressure heater controls pressure heater temperature FK2 2531 100V FK2 2532 120V FK2 2533 230V E001 E002 E003 E004 AC driver PCB J4 J11 relay PCB J628 IH IH heater unit controls fixing belt temperature E001 E002 E003 E004 IH power supply PCB J310 J301 ...

Page 612: ...Chapter 17 17 14 F 17 7 PLG1 ELCB1 SP1 H4 H3 H2 H1 H1 H2 LA1 ...

Page 613: ... the CCD processes analog images Notati on Name Parts No Description PCB1 DC controller PCB 1 IMG FM2 6297 printer unit control optional power supply control PCB2 DC controller PCB 2 MAICY FM2 6298 laser system control PCB3 relay PCB FM2 6299 printer unit load system control PCB4 Laser driver PCB Y FM2 6696 controls the drive of the laser unit Y PCB5 Laser driver PCB M FM2 6696 controls the drive ...

Page 614: ... 2317 reads the image position correction pattern PCB17 Auto registration sensor R light receiving detection PCB FG3 2316 reads the image position correction pattern PCB18 Microswitch PCB FG3 2377 detects the state open closed of the manual feed unit PCB19 Microswitch PCB FG3 2377 detects the state open closed of the front cover PCB20 Main power supply PCB 13V 24V FM2 0829 100V 120V FM2 0835 230V ...

Page 615: ...onversion RGB to CMYK F value color balance adjustment correction of misalignment among the 4 drums PCB39 Main controller PCB sub PDRM A FM2 6808 printer basic image processing background removal color space conversion RGB to CMYK F value color balance adjustment correction of misalignment among the 4 drums PCB40 Main controller PCB sub EF A FM2 6809 gradation conversion screen processing generati...

Page 616: ...on Name Parts No Description PCB17 PCB18 PCB19 PCB16 PCB15 PCB12 PCB42 PCB13 PCB44 PCB9 PCB10 PCB11 PCB7 PCB6 PCB5 PCB4 Y M C K PCB45 PCB38 PCB39 PCB37 PCB36 PCB35 PCB8 PCB43 PCB27 PCB14 PCB1 PCB2 PCB32 PCB31 PCB29 PCB33 C K PCB28 C PCB3 PCB30 PCB33 Y M PCB28 Y PCB28 M PCB28 K PCB41 PCB21 PCB22 PCB23 PCB20 PCB25 BOOT HDD PCB47 DIMM PCB26 PCB24 PCB40 PCB41 ...

Page 617: ...Chapter 18 SELF DIAGNOSIS ...

Page 618: ...Contents Contents 18 1 Error Code Table 18 1 18 1 1 Error code tables 18 1 18 2 Error Code Details 18 4 18 2 1 Table of error code details 18 4 ...

Page 619: ...e of fixing unit E003 Fixing unit low temperature trouble E004 Fixing unit protection circuit trouble E007 Fixing belt or pressure belt deviation trouble E008 Fixing unit end of life detection error E009 Pressure belt pressure release error E012 Drum ITB motor trouble E014 Fixing motor error E020 Drum developer related trouble E032 NE controller counter operation failure E110 Laser scanner motor r...

Page 620: ...Saddle switch error E602 Hard disk trouble E604 Defective or insufficient image memory SDRAM E609 Hard disk trouble E610 Hard disk encryption key failure E611 Rebooting repeat error due to SRAM failure etc E674 FAX board communication trouble E677 External controller trouble E710 IPC initializing error E711 IPC communication error E712 ADF reader communication error E713 Finisher printer communica...

Page 621: ... for memory control communication control E748 Main controller PCB error E749 Instruction to restart accompanying change in product configuration E751 Drum unit toner cartridge connection trouble E804 Controller fan error E805 Fan error Code Designation general description of error ...

Page 622: ...t Checking Disconnection of the Connector in the Thermistor Wiring Replace the fixer and AC driver PCB Replace the DC controller PCB 2 MAISY In the service mode clear the error by selecting COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR E001 Abnormally high temperature rise of fixing unit circuit trouble 0001 When the fixing belt main thermistor has detected a high temperature ASIC detection Check the connection of th...

Page 623: ...ch 80 deg C within the prescribed period of time after reaching 50 deg C during warm up 0102 When the pressure main thermistor fails to reach 100 deg C within the prescribed period of time after reaching 80 deg C during warm up E003 Fixing unit low temperature trouble 0001 When the fixing main thermistor has detected a temperature below 130 deg C for the prescribed period of time after standby Che...

Page 624: ...the pressure belt unit connectors Replace the pressure belt unit 0601 IH power supply ID error Check the connection of the connectors of the IH power supply PCB J1009 the DC controller PCB 2 MAISY J109 and the relay PCB connector In the case of not being locked after turning ON the motor 0701 Relay OFF status error Replace the relay PCB E007 Fixing belt or pressure belt deviation trouble 0001 Fixi...

Page 625: ... 0002 When the lock was disengaged after the motor was locked E020 Drum developer related trouble Concerning the first two digits of the details code in xx12 to xxD0 Å xx 01 Y Å xx 02 M Å xx 03 C Å xx 04 Bk xx20 ATR sensor trouble or a broken disconnected wire The drum unit is not installed properly or there is trouble in the unit Replace the drum unit check its connections xx24 SALT sensor troubl...

Page 626: ...place the SALT sensor clean the sensor window Replace the drum unit check its connections Replace the ITB clean it xx83 Trouble in detected ITB surface reflectivity rate value is extremely high Replace the ITB clean it xxA0 Measured value of the detected developerdensity is extremely low Trouble in the ATR sensor Trouble in the drum unit Replace the drum unit check its connections xxB0 T D ratio h...

Page 627: ...Light quantity of the exposure lamp has dropped Clean the white plate Replace the exposure lamp E227 Reader unit power supply error 0001 When the 24 V port is OFF when the power is turned ON Disconnect and re connect the power connector Replace the power supply 0002 When the 24 V port is OFF when a job is started 0003 When the 24 V port is OFF when a job is finished 0004 When the 24 V port is OFF ...

Page 628: ... period of time has been detected during communication between the copier itself and finisher Check the connections between the DC controller PCB and finisher controller PCB Replace the finisher controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB E503 Saddle communication error 0002 When communication with the saddle stitcher is interrupted Check the connections between the saddle stitcher controller PCB...

Page 629: ...since the stapler operation started Check the stapler unit connectors Replace the stapler unit Replace the finisher controller PCB 0002 When the stapler unit left the stapler home position but then failed to reach the stapler home position even though 400 ms elapsed since the stapler operation started When the unit failed to reach the stapler home position within 400 ms even after operation in the...

Page 630: ...back motor was driven for 4 sec E540 Tray up down error 0001 When the sheet level could not be detected even though the standard tray was operated Check the standard tray HP sensor connectors Check the standard tray clock sensor connectors Check the standard tray shift motor connectors Replace the standard tray HP sensor Replace the standard tray clock sensor Replace the standard tray shift motor ...

Page 631: ...operation When a discontinuous area was detected during the tray operation 8003 When the input of the clock signal could not be detected within 0 2 sec during the operation of the 1st tray shift motor 8004 When the input of the clock signal could not be detected within 0 2 sec during the operation of the 1st tray shift motor 8005 When the lock detection signal was set to OFF 150 ms after the lock ...

Page 632: ...al was set to OFF 150 ms after the lock detection signal was set to ON 8006 When the lock detection signal could not be set to ON within 1 sec after the 2nd tray shift motor started driving 8007 When the lock detection signal fails to go OFF when the 2nd tray shift motor is stopped E575 0001 When the binding motor was driven for 2000 ms in the binding direction HP sensor approach direction during ...

Page 633: ...nd punch motor clock sensor P162 connectors Replace the punch home position sensor P163 and punch motor clock sensor P162 connectors Replace the punch motor M61 8002 When the puncher cannot detect the punch home position sensor after motor drive has stopped during the initial operation of the punch motor E591 8001 When the light sensing voltage is less than 3 0 V even though the light emitting dut...

Page 634: ...When the light sensing voltage is less than 2 5 V even though the light emitting duty ratio of side registration sensor 2 LED2 PTR2 has been set to more than 66 8006 When the light sensing voltage is more than 2 0 V even though the light emitting duty ratio of side registration sensor 2 LED2 PTR2 has been set to 0 8007 When the light sensing voltage is less than 2 5 V even though the light emittin...

Page 635: ... below the prescribed number Check the sheet creasing motor clock sensor P14 and sheet creasing home position sensor P121 connectors Replace the sheet creasing motor clock sensor P14 and sheet creasing home position sensor P121 Replace the sheet creasing motor M2 8002 When the sheet creasing home position sensor status fails to change even when the sheet creasing motor is driven for 3 sec When the...

Page 636: ...position sensor fails to turn ON even when the stitch motor front has been run in the reverse direction for at least 0 5 sec E5F6 Saddle sheet push plate stapler error 8001 When the sheet push plate home position sensor fails to turn ON even when the sheet push plate motor has been run for at least 0 3 sec Check the sheet push plate home position sensor P114S connectors Replace the sheet push plat...

Page 637: ... time when it is started up Replace with an HDD which is guaranteed to operate at low temperatures 0009 When the HDD fails to reach the prescribed temperature when its operation is restored from the sleep mode Replace with an HDD which is guaranteed to operate at low temperatures E610 Hard disk encryption key failure 0001 When there is no encryption board Install the encryption board 0002 Defectiv...

Page 638: ...hen the timer device was opened Replace the main controller PCB 0011 When trouble has been detected when the timer device was started up E677 External controller trouble 0003 External controller trouble Check the cable connections Re install the external controller system When trouble was detected during the configuration check conducted when the external controller was started up 0010 When the co...

Page 639: ...error has occurred where IPC communication cannot be recovered In the service mode clear the error by selecting COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR E719 Error in communication with coin vendor card reader 0001 When the coin vendor which was connected before the power was turned OFF could not be recognized when the power was turned back ON Check the cable connections 0002 When a wire in the IPC cable connect...

Page 640: ... the whole system and re install When the font data is damaged at startup C000 Initializing error Format the whole system and re install Replace the main controller PCB C001 HDD access error Format the whole system and re install Replace the HDD Replace the main controller PCB E731 UFR PCB error 3000 When the UFR PCB cannot be recognized at startup Check the UFR PCB connections Replace the UFR PCB...

Page 641: ... controller PCB sub PE Disconnect and re connect the main controller PCB sub PE or replace Replace the main controller PCB main 3F00 3F02 When the non mounting of the main controller PCB sub PE has been detected Disconnect and re connect the main controller PCB sub PE or replace 6000 7D00 Error in communication with main controller PCB sub R Disconnect and re connect the main controller PCB sub R ...

Page 642: ...ace the main controller PCB main 4042 SDRAM size error Disconnect and re connect the SDRAM replace or add Replace the main controller PCB main 4043 MAC address read error Replace the main controller PCB sub LAN bar Replace the main controller PCB main 4045 Error in accessing the RTC Disconnect and re connect the SRAM PCB or replace Replace the main controller PCB main 4050 Error in accessing the L...

Page 643: ...heck the toner cartridge connections or replace the cartridge 02Xx Data error in the memory inside the drum unit Check the drum unit connections or replace the unit 12Xx Data error in the memory inside the toner cartridge Check the toner cartridge connections or replace the cartridge 03Xx Write error in the memory inside the drum unit when the number of retries has exceeded the rating Check the dr...

Page 644: ...Chapter 19 SERVICE MODE ...

Page 645: ...TER 19 27 19 2 6 MN CONT 19 37 19 3 ADJUST Adjustment Mode 19 39 19 3 1 COPIER 19 39 19 3 2 FEEDER 19 58 19 4 FUNCTION Operation Inspection Mode 19 59 19 4 1 COPIER 19 59 19 4 2 FEEDER 19 71 19 5 OPTION Machine Settings Mode 19 74 19 5 1 COPIER 19 74 19 5 2 FEEDER 19 122 19 5 3 SORTER 19 122 19 5 4 BOARD 19 123 19 6 TEST Test Print Mode 19 124 19 6 1 COPIER 19 124 19 7 COUNTER Counter Mode 19 128 ...

Page 646: ...ROM version of saddle stitcher controller PCB 1 OP CON ROM version of cassette pedestal controller PCB 1 MN CONT System software version of main controller PCB 1 RUI Remote UI version 1 PUNCH Punch unit version 1 LANG EN English language file version 1 LANG FR French language file version 1 LANG DE German language file version 1 LANG IT Italian language file version 1 LANG JP Japanese language fil...

Page 647: ... check the version of the Chinese language file traditional text 2 LANG ZH Use it to check the version of the Chinese language file simplified text 2 ECO ID Use it to check the ECO ID number 2 LANG BU Use it to check the version of the Bulgarian language file 2 LANG CR Use it to check the version of the Croatian language file 2 LANG RM Use it to check the version of the Romanian language file 2 LA...

Page 648: ... 2 COPIER DISPLAY ANALOG Sub item Description level TEMP Copier s internal temperature environment sensor in deg C 1 HUM Copier s internal humidity environment sensor in RH 1 ABS HUM Amount of moisture environment sensor in grams 1 FIX UC Fixing upper roller center temperature main themistor detection temperature unit deg C 1 FIX UE Fixing upper roller end temperature main themistor detection temp...

Page 649: ...r be described in detail HH Paper feed level software counter value Code Jam type 00xx Unused 01xx Delay jam 02xx Pileup jam 0Axx Jam at power ON jam during warmup 0Bxx cover open jam applies to all covers 0Dxx Transparency related jam JAM 1 7 READY AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHH...

Page 650: ...of Finisher W1 W2 1001 Inlet sensor delay jam Inlet sensor Inlet sensor delay jam Inlet sensor 1002 Puncher path sensor delay jam Trailing edge sensor 1003 Escape path sensor delay jam Escape tray path sensor 1004 Delivery path sensor delay jam Delivery path sensor 1101 Inlet sensor stationary jam Inlet sensor Inlet sensor stationary jam Inlet sensor 1102 Puncher path sensor stationary jam Trailin...

Page 651: ...putting out HP sensor Code Finisher M1 sensor type Finisher N1 saddle finisher N2 sensor type 1103 Copier paper delivery delay jam 1104 Paper delivery pileup jam 1105 Jam due to early arrival while switching trays 1500 Staple jam in stapler Staple jam in stapler 1300 Jam at power ON Jam at power ON 1400 Front top cover OPEN jam 1011 Inlet path sensor delay ja 1013 Buffer path sensor delay jam 1014...

Page 652: ...e after document s leading edge arrived at reverse registration roller nip for small size or after document s leading edge arrived at reverse outlet sensor U505 for large size duplex document Reverse registration delay 0043 SR5 Reverse paper delivery registration sensor SR5 didn t turn ON at specified amount of time after reverse inlet sensor SR4 turned ON Reverse registration pileup 0044 SR5 Reve...

Page 653: ...0014 alarm are displayed together and the jam is restored automatically 5 seconds after being processed User DADF OPEN 0091 SR6 DADF was opened during DADF operation User cover OPEN 0092 SR2 SR8 Cover was opened during DADF operation Separationsensor initial status 0094 SR3 Separation sensor SR3 was ON before separation of first document sheet Registrationfront sensor initial status 0095 U502 Regi...

Page 654: ... code 0000 if none G Error location 0 Main controller 1 DADF 2 Finisher 3 Unused 4 Reader unit 5 Printer unit 6 PDL board any of 7 Fax board ERR 1 7 READY AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G Displ...

Page 655: ...justment value for color of even numbered red bits of the CCD 2 COPIER DISPLAY DPOT Sub item Description level MEMO For items other than DPOT K displaying value at the time of the latest potential control 2TR PPR Use it to check the output value of the paper separation voltage of the secondary transfer DC voltage generated last 2 2TR BASE Use it to check the output value of the reference voltage o...

Page 656: ...power switch ON 1 DENS S Y M C K Use it to check the density value Y M C Bk detected of the sample image formed at time of ATR control 2 D Y M C K TRGT target value Y M C Bk of developer concentration 2 DEV DC Y M C K Use it to check the output value of the developing DC voltage Y M C Bk generated last 2 CHG DC Y M C K Use it to check the output value of the primary DC voltage Y M C Bk generated l...

Page 657: ... drum unit is inserted 1 COPIER DISPLAY ALARM 1 Sub item Description level IMG DT Y M C K indicates the average of image ratios for copy print jobs indicates the average image ratio color ratio within the drum unit 1 LST DY Y M C K Indicates the image duty Y M C Bk output lastly within the range of 0 100 2 ALARM 2 1 7 READY AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EE FFFF GGGG HHHHHH AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EE FFFF GGGG HHHHH...

Page 658: ...m life C 0004 Drum life K 10 Developer unit 0001 Toner out Bk 0002 Toner out C 0003 Toner out M 0004 Toner out Y 11 Waste toner conveying 0001 Waste toner box full intermediate copy belt 33 Fan 0007 Paper delivery cooling fan FM5 alarm 0012 Manual feed cooling fan FM6 alarm 0013 Copier exhaust heat fan FM3 alarm 34 Image position compensation control 0001 Incorrect data read zero included in image...

Page 659: ...system data processing mainly figure processing text processing 0003 Translator was specified that was not mounted by LIPS emulation start command 0004 Translator work memory overflow 0006 Configuration acquiring management error 0007 LIPS internal memory management error 0008 LIPS internal file management error 0009 Received data management error 0010 Page control error 0011 Macro management erro...

Page 660: ...a collection may be set in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY ENVP IN a Environment Log Screen F 19 4 b Environment Log Display 75 PS print server unit C1 0001 Error in PS print server unit C1 0002 Error due to incorrect SVG analysis received from PS print server unit C1 No number of a data piece higher the number older the data piece DATE date of data collection TIME time of data collection D deg C ...

Page 661: ...ate the manual adjustment value light reception voltage of the post separation sensor Optimum range paper present 154 or less paper absent 179 or more 1 RDSN LMN Use it to indicate manual adjustment value light emission voltage of the reader sensor Optimum range 179 or less 1 RDSN RCV Use it to indicate the manual adjustment value light reception voltage of the read sensor Optimum range paper pres...

Page 662: ... the field area given on the pages that follow F 19 5 1 Guide to the Screen F 19 6 Adjust Function Option Test Counter I O Display DC CON R CON FEEDER SORTER MN CONT Adjust Function Option Test Counter I O Display P001 P002 P003 P004 P005 P006 P007 P008 DC CON 1 3 READY xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx Bit0 Bit7 Address ...

Page 663: ...roughly half or less 9 PS15 Cassette 1 remaining volume sensor B 1 Remaining volume is roughly 50 sheets or less 10 PS20 Cassette 2 remaining volume sensor A 1 Remaining volume is roughly half or less 11 PS18 Cassette 2 remaining volume sensor B 1 Remaining volume is roughly 50 sheets or less 12 PS7 Cassette 1 paper sensor 1 ON 13 PS19 Cassette 2 paper sensor 1 ON 14 PS10 Manual paper feed paper s...

Page 664: ...ection 0 Forward 12 Drum ITB motor 0 ON 13 Fixing exhaust heat fan half speed 1 Half speed 14 Cleaner fan half speed 1 Half speed 15 Power cooling fan half speed 0 Half speed P003 0 Cassette 1 paper feed solenoid 1 ON output 1 Cassette 2 paper feed solenoid 1 ON 2 Manual paper feed unit paper feed solenoid 1 ON 3 Paper delivery path switching solenoid 1 0 Back side paper delivery 1 Front side pape...

Page 665: ... 4 PS5 Fixing conveyor unit OPEN CLOSED detection 1 CLOSED 5 Fixing heater enable 0 Enabled 6 For R D 7 PS13 Delivery vertical path cover detection 0 OPEN 1 CLOSED 8 PS28 Manual feed unit OPEN CLOSED detection 1 CLOSED 9 PS8 Center paper delivery tray full sensor 1 Full 10 PS11 Paper feed vertical path cover OPEN CLOSED sensor 1 CLOSED 11 PS23 Front cover OPEN CLOSED sensor 1 CLOSED 12 For R D 13 ...

Page 666: ...0 Transparency sensor front 1 ON 11 Transparency sensor inner 1 ON 12 For R D 13 For R D 14 For R D 15 For R D P008 0 Paper delivery vertical path motor current switching 0 See separate Table T05 401 08 output 1 Paper delivery vertical path motor current switching 1 2 Face down paper delivery motor current switching 0 See separate Table T05 401 08 3 Face down paper delivery motor current switching...

Page 667: ...ection 3 P020 0 Cassette 3 remaining volume detection A 1 Remaining volume is roughly half or less input 1 Cassette 3 remaining volume detection B 1 Remaining volume is roughly 50 sheets or less 2 Cassette 4 remaining volume detection A 1 Remaining volume is roughly half or less 3 Cassette 4 remaining volume detection B 1 Remaining volume is roughly 50 sheets or less 4 Right cover OPEN CLOSED dete...

Page 668: ...For R D 7 For R D P027 0 For R D input output 1 For R D 2 For R D 3 For R D 4 For R D 5 For R D 6 Deck motor current switching signal 0 See Table T05 401 09 7 Deck motor current switching signal 1 See Table T05 401 09 P028 0 Cassette 3 paper feed current switching signal 0 See pulse motor current setting input output table Table T05 401 08 1 Cassette 3 paper feed current switching signal 1 2 Casse...

Page 669: ...on bit Item Remarks P001 0 delivery reversal motor CLK 1 DDIS IF OPTO0 0 operation prohibited 2 DDIS IF SPRDY 0 operation permitted 3 DDIS IF OPTI0 0 active 4 ADF pickup motor CLK 5 fan power ON signal 1 ON 6 ADF read motor CLK 7 size senor ON 1 ON P002 0 shift motor CLK 1 24V power supply monitor 0 normal 2 3 not used 4 scanner motor CLK 5 13V power supply monitor 0 normal 6 Use it to switch betw...

Page 670: ... detection signal 0 enabled 3 DDIS IF SCTS 0 reception ready 4 7 not used P006 0 not used 1 PCB check terminal 1 normal 2 DDIS IF OPTI1 0 active 3 DDIS IF OPTO1 0 active 4 ADF sensor interrupt input 0 active 5 copyboard open closed sensor interrupt input 0 1 copyboard cover closed 6 HP sensor interrupt input 1 HP 7 not used P007 0 address bus 16 1 address bus 17 2 address bus 18 3 4 not used 5 ADF...

Page 671: ... 4 stamp solenoid drive 1 ON 5 clutch drive 1 ON 6 original detection LED 1 ON 7 fan motor drive 1 ON P003 0 pickup motor current setting CUT 1 read motor current setting CUT 2 shift motor current setting 3 read motor mode setting 4 read motor current setting 1 5 read motor current setting 2 6 pickup motor current setting 1 7 pickup motor current setting 2 P004 0 feeder cover open closed sensor 0 ...

Page 672: ...1 ON 4 main tray motor operation permission signal 0 ON 3 main tray motor rotation mode CCW 1 negative rotation 2 main tray motor rotation mode CW 1 positive rotation 1 writing built in flash 1 writing 0 writing built in flash 1 writing P003 7 not used 6 main tray lower limit detection I 5 not used 4 not used 3 not used 2 not used 1 main tray paper detection 1 detection 0 main tray loading volume ...

Page 673: ...ermission signal 0 ON 5 feed motor current switch 3 1 ON 4 feed motor current switch 2 1 ON 3 feed motor current switch 1 1 ON 2 feed motor current switch 0 1 ON 1 feed motor phase B 1 ON 0 feed motor phase B 1 ON P008 7 not used 6 not used 5 not used 4 stack tray paper surface detection 1 detection 3 processing tray paper presence detection 1 detection 2 stack delivery HP detection 1 detection 1 ...

Page 674: ...OM_DO 1 ON 1 EEPROM_SK 1 ON 0 EEPROM_CS 1 ON P013 7 not used 6 not used 5 24V power ON 0 ON 4 finger safety SW 1 detection 3 joint open detection 1 detection 2 not used 1 not used 0 finisher pilot LED 1 ON Address bit Description Remarks P001 0 inlet feed motor phase A signal 1 inlet feed motor phase B signal 2 inlet feed motor phase A signal 3 inlet feed motor phase B signal 4 escape feed motor p...

Page 675: ...sed 2 saddle connection detection 0 connected 3 upper tray FG IRQ3 4 swing lock HP sensor 1 HP 5 not used 6 front cover open closed sensor 0 open 7 not used P005 0 TxD for punch communication 1 RxD punch for punch communication 2 IN for punch communication IRQ2 0 ON 3 7 not used P006 1 lower tray motor LOCK 0 locked 2 not used 3 lower tray motor ON 0 ON 4 not used 5 motor standby signal 0 ON 6 not...

Page 676: ... CCW 0 CW 1 upper tray motor ON 0 ON 2 upper tray motor LOCK 0 locked 3 solenoid ON signal 0 ON 4 5 not used 6 lower tray motor CW CCW 1 CCW 0 CW 7 delivery path sensor 1 paper present P012 0 inlet roller shift solenoid 1 ON 1 buffer roller shift solenoid 1 ON 2 expansion IO chip select signal CS2 3 IPC chip select CS3 4 7 not used P013 0 gear change motor phase A signal 1 gear change motor phase ...

Page 677: ...e B signal 6 7 not used P019 0 escape tray path sensor 1 paper present 1 escape tray full sensor 1 full 2 stapler HP detection 1 HP 3 stapler READY 1 ready 4 stapler LS 1 staple present 5 escape feed upper cover sensor 1 close 6 stapler shift HP sensor 1 HP 7 stapler alignment interference sensor 1 interference P020 0 stapler shift motor current switch I0 0 ON 1 stapler shift motor current switch ...

Page 678: ...signal 2 saddle guide motor current switch I0 0 ON 3 saddle feed motor current switch I0 0 ON 4 saddle feed motor phase A signal 5 saddle feed motor phase B signal 6 saddle feed motor phase A signal 7 saddle feed motor phase B signal P026 0 saddle alignment motor phase A signal 1 saddle alignment motor phase B signal 2 saddle alignment motor current switch I0 0 ON 3 saddle paper positioning motor ...

Page 679: ...031 0 saddle position HP sensor 0 HP 1 saddle guide HP sensor 1 HP 2 inlet cover sensor 1 close 3 saddle stapler unit sensor 0 detected 4 saddle butting HP sensor IRQ4 1 HP 5 saddle butting TOP sensor IRQ5 1 butting position 6 trimmer IN IRQ6 0 ON 7 saddle feed motor CLK IRQ7 P032 0 saddle tray paper sensor 0 paper present 1 positioning plate paper sensor 0 paper present 2 saddle crescent roller s...

Page 680: ...ON 3 DIPSW_4 0 ON 4 DIPSW_5 0 ON 5 DIPSW_6 0 ON 6 DIPSW_7 0 ON 7 DIPSW_8 0 ON P037 0 not used 1 PUSHSW1 0 ON 2 5V detection signal 0 detected 3 24V detection signal 0 detected 4 for revision control 5 for revision control 6 for revision control 7 for revision control P038 0 download ON signal 1 ON 1 not used 4 LED3 0 ON 5 LED2 0 ON 6 LED1 0 ON 7 power on signal 0 ON P039 0 DIPSW1 0 ON 1 DIPSW2 0 O...

Page 681: ...tor CUR 0 ON 6 PWM 7 not used P043 0 LED1 0 ON 1 horizontal registration motor INA 2 horizontal registration motor INB 3 LED2 0 ON 4 front cover sensor 0 close 5 BOOTMODE 6 PUSHSW2 0 ON 7 PUSHSW1 0 ON P044 0 4 not used 5 upper cover sensor 1 open 6 7 not used P045 ADDRA not used P046 ADDRB not used P047 AD0 trailing edge sensor P048 AD1 B5R sensor P049 AD2 A4R sensor P050 AD3 B4 sensor P051 AD6 du...

Page 682: ...Printer Controller 3 DDI P RTS signal Controller Printer 4 DDI P Power Ready signal Controller Printer 5 DDI P Power Ready signal Printer Controller 6 Copy allowing signal Control card 7 Copy allowing signal Coin machine P003 0 Controller cooling fan ON signal 1 ON 0 OFF 1 USB host Power 5V control signal 1 ON 0 OFF 2 PCI Serror interruption clear 3 FAX reset signal 4 for R D 5 for R D 6 for R D 7...

Page 683: ...2 Power control signal 3 6 not used 7 Modem board detection signal 0 Connected 1 Unconnected P008 0 FRAM CLK 1 FRAM DATA 2 FRAM WP 3 7 not used P009 0 SPD CLK 1 SPD DT 2 4 not used 5 Emergency night power source 13V ON signal 0 OFF 1 ON 6 Emergency night power source switching signal 0 High efficiency 1 Standard 7 Emergency night power source 24V ON signal 0 OFF 1 ON P010 0 LCD Backlit switch cont...

Page 684: ...ve the image read start position toward the front by 0 1 mm i e move the image read area toward the front if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB enter the value indicated on the service label Range of Adjustment 47 to 131 Factory default After RAM clear 90 Attention If you have changed the setting be sure to record the new setting on the ...

Page 685: ...Attention If you have changed the setting be sure to record the new setting on the service label 1 COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY Sub item Description level Document Platen glass incorporating white plate White plate Image s leading edge Document illumination lamp Vertical size plate Decreasing setting value read start position moves in direction of leading edge Increasing setting value read start position ...

Page 686: ...d the reader controller PCB enter the value indicated on the service label Range of Adjustment 9 to 9 Factory default After RAM clear 0 1 FCCDU RG Use it to correct color displacement in sub scanning direction between R and G associated with the CCD unit at time of shipment Method of Adjustment if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB enter...

Page 687: ...e initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB enter the value indicated on the service label Range of Adjustment 256 to 256 Factory default After RAM clear 0 Attention If you have changed the setting be sure to record the new setting on the service label 1 50DF GB Use it to indicate the degree of offset color displacement GB for ADF mode at 50 reading Met...

Page 688: ...item e g as caused by soiling of the chart enter the factory measurement using this mode if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB enter the value indicated on the service label Range of Adjustment 1 to 2047 Factory default After RAM clear 1189 Attention If you have changed the setting be sure to record the new setting on the service label 1...

Page 689: ...t value post RAM clear value 0 1 LDADJ3 Y A C laser reproduction ratio Y C laser reproduction adjustment value Y based on the A laser reproduction ratio of the laser scanner unit Unless an appropriate value is entered here reproduction ratios of the laser A and C become different resulting in exposed images of different reproduction ratios Setting range 512 511 Factory default value post RAM clear...

Page 690: ...range 512 511 Factory default value post RAM clear value 0 1 LDADJ3 M A D laser reproduction ratio M D laser reproduction adjustment value M based on the A laser reproduction ratio of the laser scanner unit Unless an appropriate value is entered here reproduction ratios of the laser A and D become different resulting in exposed images of different reproduction ratios Setting range 512 511 Factory ...

Page 691: ...ange 0 1023 Factory default value post RAM clear value 0 1 LDADJ5 C A C laser phase difference C A C inter laser phase difference exposure start timing adjustment value C of the laser scanner unit Unless an appropriate value is entered here A and C laser phases exposure starting position become different resulting in faulty exposed image Setting range 0 1023 Factory default value post RAM clear va...

Page 692: ...erent resulting in faulty exposed image Setting range 0 1023 Factory default value post RAM clear value 0 1 LDADJ6 K A D laser phase difference Bk A D inter laser phase difference exposure start timing adjustment value Bk of the laser scanner unit Unless an appropriate value is entered here A and D laser phases exposure starting position become different resulting in faulty exposed image Setting r...

Page 693: ...ller PCB has been cleared the DC controller has been replaced Adjustment range 3 to 5 Factory default After RAM clear 0 2 T SPLY C Adjusting the amount of toner supply C color Adjustment method Enter a value of the service label when RAM of the DC controller PCB has been cleared the DC controller has been replaced Adjustment range 3 to 5 Factory default After RAM clear 0 2 T SPLY K Adjusting the a...

Page 694: ...ntroller PCB s RAM or replaced the SRAM PCB enter the value on the service label Adjustment range 0 to 1000 Factory default After RAM clear 59 1 BLANK L Used to enter adjusted value of image blank width left edge Adjustment method If you have cleared the main controller PCB s RAM or replaced the SRAM PCB enter the value on the service label Adjustment range 0 to 1000 Factory default After RAM clea...

Page 695: ... Adjusting the upper limit of chargeDC Adjustment range 10 to 0 1 step 25V Factory default After RAM clear 0 Change a setting value when either of the following faulty images occurs Color blanking in the highlight area especially on low density image Fogging when making a large number of low density image copies 2 VD LIM C Adjusting the upper limit of charge DC Adjustment range 10 to 0 1 step 25V ...

Page 696: ...on Recommended setting value 2 2 COPIER ADJUST HV PRI Sub item Description level LSUB Y M C KDC LSUB Y M C KDC Used to turn ON OFF of DC bias offset for the downstream auxiliary brush Whenever possible avoid using this setting during normal operation 2 USUB Y M C KAC USUB Y M C KAC Used to adjust upstream auxiliary brush charge voltage Whenever possible avoid using this setting during normal opera...

Page 697: ...vy1 6 Heavy2 7 Special paper 1 including labels 8 Glossy paper 9 Special paper 2 including Japanese paper 10 Postcards envelopes 11 Transparencies color 12 Transparencies monochrome 2 TR ENV1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TR ENV1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 environmental item for secondary transfer offset adjustment Enter value of COPIER DISPLAY MISC ENV TR 1 Low humidity environment Factory default After RAM clear 1 2 Normal ...

Page 698: ...ry transfer current is high Change a setting value to the direction 2 1TR TGK1 Adjusting target current offset of primary transfer ATVC K Black monochrome mode Adjustment range 5 to 5 unit 0 5 uA default 0 It is enabled when COPIER OPTION BODY PTATVCSW 1 primary ATVC control is enabled Change a setting value when any of the following faulty images occurs Mottle marks Mark of the auxiliary brush du...

Page 699: ...efault After RAM clear 0 1 REG NORM Registration clutch ON timing plain paper Adjusts the margin on the leading edge 0 1mm scale by adjusting the timing to turn ON the registration clutch for plain paper Setting Range 50 50 Factory default value post RAM clear value 20 1 REG THCK Registration clutch ON timing thick paper Adjusts the margin on the leading edge 0 1mm scale by adjusting the timing to...

Page 700: ...on curl Setting range 50 to 50 Factory settings and after RAM clear 0 1 LP MULT2 Pre registration loop adjustment during multi pickup thick paper and OHT Adjusts pre registration loop adjustment during thick paper and OHT multi pickup in increments of 0 5mm Adjustment method Moving the setting in the plus direction in increments of 0 5mm increases the pre registration curl Moving the setting in th...

Page 701: ... have cleared the DC controller PCB s RAM or replaced the DC controller PCB enter the value on the service label When replacing the paper width detection VR or registering a new value perform the following service mode FUNCTION CST Adjustment range 0 to 255 Factory default After RAM clear 235 1 MF A4 Used to enter the basic value for the manual feed tray s paper width A4 Adjustment method If you h...

Page 702: ...d white documents increase the setting value To make documents more easily recognized as color documents decrease the setting value Adjustment range 3to 3 Value at time of factory shipment value after RAM clear 0 1 ACS EN ACS EN Used to adjust ACS recognition zone Increasing the setting value expands the recognition zone 2 ACS CNT ACS CNT Used to adjust color recognition pixel count zone during AC...

Page 703: ...t A higher setting will delay the image leading edge timing Range of adjustment 50 to 50 unit 0 1mm Factory default After RAM clear 0 1 LA SPEED Adjusting the document feeding speed at the time of stream reading from the feeder The speed becomes faster image is reduced by increasing setting value Range of adjustment 30 to 30 unit 0 1 Factory default After RAM clear 0 1 ...

Page 704: ...mmy transfer cleaning unit since the cleaning plate may be damaged otherwise 3 Turn the main power switch ON 4 Select this item and press the OK key 5 Wait for the operation to stop automatically The operation may take between 6 and 180 minutes depending on the environment 6 OK is displayed when the operation completes normally 7 Insert the drum units toner containers and transfer cleaning unit an...

Page 705: ... is enabled 1 CNT INTV 1 Set interval of counter transmission to server Sets transmission intervals for transmission of counter information to server via E RDS third party extension function 1 COPIER FUNCTION CCD Sub item Description level DF WLVL1 2 Use it to adjust the ADF white level Method of Operation 1 Place the type of original most often used by the user on the copyboard glass and perform ...

Page 706: ...ion manually by opening the scanner unit you may touch the lens For this reason be sure to do it by the automatic operation This Service Mode is used to correct the tilt of Y M and C against BK which is used as a reference when the tilt is large when the horizontal lines are higher at the right 2 COPIER FUNCTION CST Sub item Description level MF A4R MF A6R MF A4 Registers basic value of manual fee...

Page 707: ... Image imperfections are improved by forcibly consuming toner that has been over agitated toner with improper charge by the toner agitation screw Operation method 1 Select this item and press the OK key 2 The cleaning operation lasts about 160 seconds then ends automatically 1 COPIER FUNCTION FIXING Sub item Description level NIP CHK not use 1 FX UHP S Fixing belt upper belt displacement control a...

Page 708: ...is item stops the LED CHK operation 1 KEY CHK Used to check key input Operation method 1 Select KEY CHK to display the number name of the entered key 2 Press the key to check If the key is normal the text for it appears in the touch panel see separate table 3 Select KEY CHK again to exit the key input check operation 1 TOUCHCH K Used to adjust coordinate positions of analog touch panel Operation m...

Page 709: ...n for operation check Range 1 to 10 7 and above are reserved Operation method 1 Select this item 2 Enter the desired fan code on the numeric keypad 1 Power cooling fan FM1 2 Fixing exhaust heat fan FM2 3 Copier exhaust heat fan FM3 4 Cleaner fan FM4 5 Paper delivery cooling fan FM5 6 Manual feed cooling fan FM6 3 Press the OK key 4 Press FAN ON and check the operation 1 FAN ON Starts fan operation...

Page 710: ...tch tool 2 Select this item and press the OK key 10 seconds ON OFF Horizontal resist motor 1 Select this item and press the OK key HP search operation starts Stops automatically when complete Motors other than toner container motors Y M C K or horizontal resist motor 1 Select this item and press the OK key 10 seconds ON OFF 1 SL Used to specify solenoid for operation check Range 1 to 15 10 and abo...

Page 711: ...necessary enter the settings printed out using PRINT 1 JAM HIST Clears reader controller PCB s RAM The RAM is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF ON Operation method 1 Select COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT to print out the service mode setting values 2 Select this item then press the OK key 3 Turn the main power OFF ON 4 Enter the data printed by the P PRINT operation as needed 1 ERR...

Page 712: ...ing values 2 Select this item then press the OK key 3 Turn the main power OFF ON 1 MMI Clears following user mode setting values Backup data for copy operation panel user set values Common settings backup data user set values Backup data except fax data user set values The setting values are cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF ON Operation method 1 Select this item then press the OK ...

Page 713: ... and key deleted together When the serviceman needs to replace or dispose of the device the CA authentication and key can be deleted together 2 KEY CLR HDD encoding board code key clear The HDD encoding board security kit code key is cleared to allow replacement When this item is selected and OK pressed the code key is cleared Then when the main power supply is turned OFF ON the encoding board ins...

Page 714: ...AY Procedure 1 Select this mode 2 Press OK to print out Reference Only DISPLAY items are printed out Items of P PRINT LBL PRINT HIST PRINT and ALARM are excluded 1 ENV PRT Outputting logs of inside machine temperature and humidity fixing roller surface temperature Procedure 1 Select this mode 2 Press OK to output logs of inside machine temperature and humidity fixing roller surface temperature Ref...

Page 715: ... Press the OK key 1 HD CHECK Use it to check the entire HD and perform recovery Operation method set 0 to the following COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM CHK TYPE 1 Select this item 2 Press the OK key 1 HD CLEAR Initializes partition specified by CHK TYPE item The following must be kept in mind and the user must be properly informed of the fact when using CHECK TYPE 0 entire HDD no operation occurs to initia...

Page 716: ...und 20 sheets of A4 can be printed out 2 FEEDER FUNCTION Sub item Description level SENS INT Use it to adjust the sensitivity of the individual sensors of the feeder Select the item and press the OK key to start feeder sensor initialization turning the screen indication to ACT The operation will end automatically turning the indication to OK 1 MTR CHK Use it to check the motor and the like of the ...

Page 717: ...eration will stop in 200 msec however unless you press the OK key once again the indication will not change to STOP 1 FAN CHK Use it to check the DF cooling fan Perform using FAN ON 1 Press FAN CHK to highlight 2 Enter the number of the component using the keypad 3 Press the OK key 4 Press FAN ON to start checking the operation Component Number 0 cooling fan 1 FAN ON Use it to start the operation ...

Page 718: ...operation will stop automatically in 5 sec however the indication will not change to STOP unless the OK key is pressed once again 1 ROLL CLN Use it to clean the ADF roller In this mode item the roller is rotated by the work of its motor it is cleaned by lint free paper moistened with alcohol forced against it while it rotates Operation 1 Press ROLL CLN to highlight 2 While the roller is rotating c...

Page 719: ...tting values 0 Don t display Factory default After RAM clear 1 Display Drum unit life is displayed by selecting System status Consumable part display in the user screen 1 CONFIG Used to select from among multiple sets of firmware stored on the hard disk to switch the copier s country language manufacturer and paper size system The setting value takes effect after the main power switch is turned OF...

Page 720: ...scharge current volume control single cycle ATVC control ATR control SALT Dmax control image position compensation 1 Compression mode 1 Adjustment set 1 Discharge current volume control single cycle ATVC control ATR control image position compensation Adjustment set 2 Discharge current volume control single cycle ATVC control 1 INTROT 1 Sets the execution interval number of sheets for image stabil...

Page 721: ...ar 2 1 DEVL PTH Sets threshold value number of sheets for starting toner forcible consumption sequence Use this item when copying printing consecutive images with low color ratios Operation method If the density drops below the set threshold value when copying printing method consecutive low color ratio images once the set number of sheets has been exceeded the toner forcible consumption sequence ...

Page 722: ...NTR DSP Selecting screen in response to the external controller Settings 0 The external controllericon is displayed on the control panel of the copier Factory default After RAM clear When the color image server is connected 1 The control panel of the copier becomes nondisplay mode When the control panel mounted external controller is connected 1 BASE SW Use it when trouble attributable to MEAP app...

Page 723: ...an the original size productivity decreases due to a larger scanning area 2 SENS CNF Use it to set the original sensor Settings 0 AB configuration 1 inch configuration Factory default After RAM clear 0 2 RAW DATA Sets whether to print out raw received data 0 Normal operation Factory default After RAM clear 1 Print out raw received data 2 RMT LANG Used to select language of remote UI used from Web ...

Page 724: ...2 C4HTR DT Cassette heater Sets lighting ratio of cassette on 4th level Whenever possible avoid using this setting during normal operation 2 C2HTR DT Cassette heater Sets lighting ratio of cassette on 2nd level Whenever possible avoid using this setting during normal operation 2 Y PTN Used to eliminate 100 mm horizontal lines 0 Don t imprint Y dot patterns on intermediate transfer belt 1 Imprint Y...

Page 725: ...this setting during normal operation 2 PRN FLG Used to select area flag for PDL images Whenever possible avoid using this setting during normal operation 2 SCN FLG Used to select area flag for copy images Whenever possible avoid using this setting during normal operation 2 T LW LVL Used to switch timing for display of remaining toner volume warning message Whenever possible avoid using this settin...

Page 726: ...ode used in photo mode 0 OFF Use monochrome mode when reading monochrome documents in printed photo or photographic printing paper photo mode 1 ON Use simple color mode when reading monochrome documents in printed photo or photographic printing paper photo mode Instead of creating monochrome images in 4 colors simple color mode applies only a very small amount of Y M C toner to the ITB 2 MODELSZ 2...

Page 727: ...oid using this setting during normal operation 2 UISW DSP switch appearing on the User screen use it to enable disable the indication of the switch used to switch between Standard Setup screen and Simplified setup screen e g for Lawson self copy shop 0 disable indication of switch Factory default After RAM clear 1 enable indication of switch Reference a model supporting a coin vendor mechanism may...

Page 728: ... correction will be substituted for the patch on the high density side at time of D half other than in full correction Settings 0 use patch image read data of full correction at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 1 do not use patch image read data of full correction Factory default After RAM clear 0 2 LSUB DWY Switching DC bias voltage of the lower auxiliary brush Settings 0 Bias is standard...

Page 729: ...o 1 2 U NAME Use it to set a user name required to connect to the SSH server Sets a login user name required to connect to the SSH server Only one user can login the server Setting range 8 characters maximum English one byte characters Factory default After RAM clear gN3Fp2A Do not change this setting because this is for future expansion This is valid only when 1 ON is set to SSH SW 2 U PASWD Use ...

Page 730: ...ort number Changes the port number for status connection in a TUIF over TCP IP environment This is used for changing the port No in service NAVI settings 1 to 65535 default 20010 MEMO T O T TUIF over TCP IP Communication protocol between embedded application presentation UI and applications within the device including COPY SEND BOX etc Canon original protocol CHNG CMD Use it to set the T O T TUIF ...

Page 731: ... assembly idle rotation time of first thing in the morning Settings 0 1 minute 1 2 minutes Factory default After RAM clear 0 Default of idle rotation time is 1 minute since iR C3200 iR C3220 Dcon V12 1 to prolong life of the process cartridge However use this mode to set 2 minutes if any trouble faulty image etc occurs due to reduction of the time 2 MEAP SSL Use it to set an HTTPS port for MEAP Se...

Page 732: ...in FAX IFAX modes are converted to PDF and then reduced for transmission as email or for file transmission Setting range 1 to 65535 Factory settings and after RAM clear 515 2 ORG A4R Sets special paper sizes in ADF Sets special paper sizes that cannot be detected in the ADF Setting values 0 A4R 1 FOLIO R Factory settings and after RAM clear 0 2 PDF RDCT Switches to reduction transmission for recep...

Page 733: ...ns screens that used to be treated as job status screens in the conventional system status have been upgraded to tab screens 2 WUEV SW Sleep notification switch Sets whether to notify the DS application on the network when the copier main unit enters or recovers from sleep mode Setting values 0 Send sleep notification 1 Do not send sleep notification Factory settings and after RAM clear 0 2 WUEV I...

Page 734: ...y and non display of control panel hold job screen Some users with customized control panels prefer not to display this screen Setting values 0 No display 1 Display Factory settings and after RAM clear 1 2 PASCL TY Sets paper to be used with PASCAL reader printer Sets type of paper to be used with PASCAL reader printer Setting values differs by region differs by region 1 CLC SK 80 g for regions ot...

Page 735: ...the rear end of the paper scraped occurs at half speed printing Setting range 5 to 5 Factory settings and after RAM clear 1 2 FX LOOP3 TBF loop control and trailing edge OFF timing OHP glossy paper Changes the timing of TBF loop control and trailing edge OFF when OHP or glossy paper is being used Setting range 5 to 5 Factory settings and after RAM clear 1 2 FXLP2 SW Loop control OFF half speed Set...

Page 736: ...Switch toner ejection threshold value C Sets threshold value of mean image ratio for forced toner ejection sequence Setting range 1 to 5 Factory settings and after RAM clear 2 2 DELV THM Switch toner ejection threshold value M Sets threshold value of mean image ratio for forced toner ejection sequence Setting range 1 to 5 Factory settings and after RAM clear 2 2 DELV THK Switch toner ejection thre...

Page 737: ...es 0 Normal productivity 1 32 cpm 2 12 cpm Factory settings and after RAM clear 1 2 FXLP DWN Modify the arching level before fixing Modify the S arching level between the secondary transfer to fixing at plain paper printing When the center of the image scraped occurs at plain paper printing set 1 at this mode Setting value 0 Level of modifying arching 1 1 Level of modifying arching 2 2 Level of mo...

Page 738: ...Setting values 0 to 999 Factory default After RAM clear 232 1 COUNTER 4 Used to change the counter type display for the operation panel s software counter 4 to meet user or dealer requirements Reference Lets you change the counter data to meet user or dealer requirements Setting values 0 to 999 Factory default After RAM clear 324 1 COUNTER 5 Used to change the counter type display for the operatio...

Page 739: ...This setting is only for stores that request it 1 Display Count print function can be used Factory default After RAM clear 1 CNT SW use it to select charge counters and default display items 100 V model only Settings 0 counter 1 101 total 1 counter 2 108 total black and white 1 counter 3 232 copy full color mono color 1 counter 3 234 copy full color mono color 1 1 counter 1 101 total 2 counter 2 2...

Page 740: ...es and fax numbers from the LDAP server Setting values 0 includes 1 does not include 2 is equal to 3 is not equal to 4 begins with 5 ends with Factory settings and after RAM clear 4 1 FROM OF Sets whether to delete from address when sending mail Setting values 0 Do not delete from address 1 Delete from Factory settings and after RAM clear 0 1 SPEAKER Sets text to speech user mode Speaker Headphone...

Page 741: ... switch date display 0 YYMM DD 1 DD MM YY 2 MM DD YY 2 MB CCV Used to select whether to restrict mailbox control card users 0 Don t restrict 1 Restrict 2 TRY STP Used to set mode in which output stops when tray is full 0 Normal mode Interrupted when finisher tray is full 1 Interrupted only by height detection 2 MF LG ST Sets long length mode key Setting values 0 Normal setting 1 Display long lengt...

Page 742: ...ed for each page Factory default After RAM clear 1 Compatible other controller mode not in use 2 Reserved 2 PRJOB CP Setting for count pulse on off at receipt print report print When using account managing device e g coin vendor non Canon control card it switches over on off the count pulse notice for every page at receipt print report print 0 disable generation of count pulse Factory default Afte...

Page 743: ...password of file server is hidden from the exported file to avoid leakage of information 2 MEAPSAFE Switching over to the MEAP safe mode Settings 0 Normal mode Factory default After RAM clear 1 Safe mode Safe mode works to stop the added MEAP application and to startup the only system application that was activated at initial state to start up the system safely Set 1 to startup in safe mode in the...

Page 744: ...cape image and portrait image can be duplexed printing using Canon controller This is the compatible mode with non Canon controller 5 through 65535 backup When the setting value is 1 the output will be equivalent to that of iR2200 2800 3300 series Whereas when the setting value is 2 the output will be equivalent to that of iR105 series 2 CNCT RLZ Use it to enable disable the connection serializati...

Page 745: ...ve enabled MEAP programme Setting values 0 1 32 spec restrictions by bit setting Bit0 Image file acquisition function 0 OFF 1 ON Bit1 Form registration merge function 0 OFF 1 ON Bit2 Document edit function 0 OFF 1 ON Other bits are not set but will be added as and when needed 4 byte needed Factory settings and after RAM clear 0 2 DOM ADD Sets domain complement for transmission destination when sen...

Page 746: ...t Factory settings and after RAM clear 0 2 N FAXOF Switches new FAX destination prohibition ON OFF Sets whether to prohibit new FAX destinations selection is disabled Setting values 0 Do not prohibit 1 Prohibit Factory settings and after RAM clear 0 2 N IFAXOF Switches new IFAX destination prohibition ON OFF Sets whether to prohibit new IFAX destinations selection is disabled Setting values 0 Do n...

Page 747: ... 109 Total black and white 2 yes 110 Total monocolor large yes 111 Total monocolor small yes 112 Total black and white large yes 113 Total black and white small yes 114 Total 1 two sided yes 115 Total 2 two sided yes 116 Large two sided yes 117 Small two sided yes 118 Total monocolor 1 yes 119 Total monocolor 2 yes 120 Total full color large yes 121 Total full color small yes 122 Total full color ...

Page 748: ...lor small two sided yes 235 Copies monocolor large two sided yes 236 Copies monocolor small two sided yes 237 Copies black and white large two sided yes 238 Copies black and white small two sided yes 245 Copies A full color 1 yes 246 Copies A full color 2 yes 247 Copies A monocolor 1 yes 248 Copies A monocolor 2 yes 249 Copies A black and white 1 yes 250 Copies A black and white 2 yes 251 Copies A...

Page 749: ... sided yes 291 Local copies monocolor large two sided yes 292 Local copies monocolor small two sided yes 293 Local copies black and white large two sided yes 294 Local copies black and white small two sided yes 002 Remote copies full color 1 yes 003 Remote copies full color 2 yes 004 Remote copies monocolor 1 yes 005 Remote copies monocolor 2 yes 006 Remote copies black and white 1 yes 007 Remote ...

Page 750: ...21 Prints full color monocolor large yes 322 Prints full color monocolor small yes 323 Prints full color monocolor 2 yes 324 Prints full color monocolor 1 yes 325 Prints full color large two sided yes 326 Prints full color small two sided yes 327 Prints monocolor large two sided yes 328 Prints monocolor small two sided yes 329 Prints black and white large two sided yes 330 Prints black and white s...

Page 751: ... monocolor large yes 416 Copies prints monocolor small yes 417 Copies prints full color large two sided yes 418 Copies prints full color small two sided yes 419 Copies prints monocolor large two sided yes 420 Copies prints monocolor small two sided yes 421 Copies prints black and white large two sided yes 422 Copies prints black and white small two sided yes 501 Scans total 1 502 Scans total 2 503...

Page 752: ...ived prints large yes 704 Received prints small 705 Received prints full color 1 706 Received prints full color 2 707 Received prints gray scale 1 708 Received prints gray scale 2 yes 709 eceived prints black and white 1 yes 710 Received prints black and white 2 711 Received prints full color large 712 Received prints full color small 713 Received prints gray scale large 714 Received prints gray s...

Page 753: ...ed 822 Report prints full color small two sided 823 Report prints gray scale large two sided 824 Report prints gray scale small two sided yes 825 Report prints black and white large two sided yes 826 Report prints black and white small two sided 901 Copy scan total 1 color 902 Copy scan total 1 black and white 903 Copy scan total 2 color 904 Copy scan total 2 black and white 905 Copy scan total 3 ...

Page 754: ...s 940 Remote scans black and white 941 Sent scans faxes color 942 Sent scans faxes black and white 943 Sent scans I faxes color 944 Sent scans I faxes black and white yes 945 Sent scans e mails color yes 946 Sent scans e mails black and white 947 Sent scans FTP color 948 Sent scans FTP black and white 949 Sent scans SMB color 950 Sent scans SMB black and white 951 Sent scans IPX color 952 Sent sca...

Page 755: ...play when U2 paper size group is detected ON OFF 0 Display U2 on touch panel default 1 Display paper name set by CST U2 service mode item 2 CST U1 U2 Used to specify paper name used by U1 U2 paper size group 24 FOOLSCAP CST U2 Default 25 Australian FOOLSCAP 26 OFFICIO 27 Ecuador OFFICIO 28 Bolivia OFFICIO 29 Argentine LETTER 30 Argentine LETTER R 31 Government LETTER 32 Government LETTER R 34 Gove...

Page 756: ...ttings use SMB printing O Network settings TCP IP settings use IPP printing O Network settings TCP IP settings IP address range settings print permitted address ON OFF ON Network settings TCP IP settings use FTP printing OFF 1 DK P Used to set paper size used by paper deck option Setting values 0 A4 Factory default After RAM clear 1 B5 2 LTR 1 CARD SW Used to select UI screen when coin vendor is s...

Page 757: ...ee if some kind of network trouble interferes with the pickup delivery notification if Ack is not returned after DA by continuing to output the notification Setting values 2 to 10 Factory settings and after RAM clear 6 E g If the value is 5 if Ack is not returned after DA 5 sheets will be picked up If iR DA communication is disrupted for some reason the device will still operate for 5 sheets print...

Page 758: ... address settings RARP use System management settings Network settings TCP IP settings IP address settings BOOTP use System management settings Network settings Ethernet driver settings Automatic detection System management settings Network settings Spool function use When 3 or 4 is selected as the setting value the following settings are turned OFF in addition to the items above System management...

Page 759: ...ion PDF transmission function when the transfer function is set invalid Setting value 0 SEND encryption PDF transmission function not available not installed 1 SEND encryption PDF transmission function available installed Factory default After RAM clear 0 2 TR ENPDF Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the SEND encryption PDF transmission function when the transfer function is set invalid...

Page 760: ... Factory default After RAM clear 0 2 TR PDFDR Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the PDF Direct when the transfer function is set invalid Obtains the transfer license key to use the PDF Direct in other MFP machine 2 OF PDFDR 1 Use it to select whether to use the PDF Direct when the transfer function is set invalid Setting value 0 Do not use PDF Direct 1 Use PDF Direct Factory default Af...

Page 761: ...it to obtain the transfer license key for VNC when the transfer function is set invalid Obtains the transfer license key to use VNC in other MFP machine 2 OF VNC 1 Use it to select whether to use VNC when the transfer function is set invalid Setting value 0 Do not use VNC 1 Use VNC Factory default After RAM clear 0 2 ST WEB Use it to display the installation status of the WEB browser when the tran...

Page 762: ...transfer invalidation Acquires transfer licence key to allow main unit watermark function to be used with another MFP 2 OF WTMRK 1 Main unit watermark function ON OFF in transfer invalidation Switches main unit watermark function ON OFF Setting values 0 OFF 1 ON Factory settings and after RAM clear 0 2 ST TSPDF Display of installation status of time stamped PDF transmission function in transfer in...

Page 763: ...tches device signature attached PDF transmission function ON OFF Setting values 0 OFF 1 ON Factory settings and after RAM clear 0 2 ST SCPDF Display of installation status of scalable PDF transmission function in transfer invalidation Displays installation status of scalable PDF transmission function Setting values 0 No not installed 1 Yes installed Factory settings and after RAM clear 0 2 TR SCPD...

Page 764: ...ion status of PS in transfer invalidation Displays installation status of PS Setting values 0 No not installed 1 Yes installed Reference value 0 2 TR PS PS transfer licence key acquisition in transfer invalidation Acquires transfer licence key to allow PS to be used with another MFP 2 OF PS 1 PS ON OFF in transfer invalidation Switches PS ON OFF Setting values 0 OFF 1 ON Reference value 0 2 ST PCL...

Page 765: ...lled Reference value 0 2 TR LIPS4 LIPS4 transfer licence key acquisition in transfer invalidation Acquires transfer licence key to allow LIPS4 to be used with another MFP Reference value Transfer licence key 24 digits 2 ST PSPCL Display of installation status of PC and PCL in transfer invalidation Displays installation status of compound option made up of PC and PCL Setting range 0 No not installe...

Page 766: ... and UFR Setting range 0 No not installed 1 Yes installed Reference value 0 2 TR PSPCU PS PCL and UFR transfer licence key acquisition in transfer invalidation Acquires transfer licence key to allow compound option made up of PS PCL and UFR to be used with another MFP Reference value Transfer licence key 24 digits 2 ST LXUFR Display of installation status of LIPS LX overseas name UFR II in transfe...

Page 767: ...MP SW Use it to specify the presence absence of the stamp This mode item indicates the presence absence of the stamp and is designed for use by the service person Settings 0 stamp absent 1 stamp present Factory default After RAM clear 0 1 SORTER OPTION Sub item Description level BLNK SW Fold position margin width W settings when saddle stitcher is used Setting values 0 Normal width 5 mm 1 Extra wi...

Page 768: ... as copy model without E code display 1 UFR board identification check performed With no UFR board E code is displayed 1 MENU 1 to 4 Displays printer setting menu levels 1 to 4 Setting values 0 No display 1 Display Factory settings and after RAM clear 0 2 TR DSP Toggles between display non display of toner reduction function switch Should be avoided where possible during normal operation 2 ...

Page 769: ...setting is only valid for test prints Factory default After RAM clear 0 1 THRU Used to select whether to use image compensation table during test print output Setting values 0 ON Use 1 OFF Don t use Factory default After RAM clear 0 1 DENS Y M C K Used to adjust density of each color for test prints TYPE 5 Setting values 0 to 255 Increasing the value increases the density Factory default After RAM...

Page 770: ...lization 1 double sided Factory default After RAM clear 0 1 PG QTY Use it to set the output mode for test printing Use it to set the copy count of test printing 1 to 999 Factory default After RAM clear 1 1 Entered number Description 0 Image from CCD normal print 1 For development 2 For development 3 For development 4 16 gradations 5 Full sheet half tones 6 Grid 7 For development 8 For development ...

Page 771: ...he connection to the network at time of installation or when there is a network connection problem 1 BML DISP Switching display of the screen in response to support for BMlinks Settings 0 Normal system status screen Factory default After RAM clear 1 Screen of device display only 2 Counter Option Function I O NETWORK 1 1 READY OK Display Adjust PING IP address input Result display OK NG 0 0 0 0 Tes...

Page 772: ...connection and redo Step 5 6 Select the COPIER TEST NETWORK PING service mode item enter the loop back address 127 0 0 1 and press the OK key followed by the start key If NG is displayed there is a problem with the local TCP IP settings Go back to Step 3 and check the settings again If OK is displayed there is no problem with the local TCP IP settings However there could be a problem with the netw...

Page 773: ...m or shorter in the feed direction DRBL 2 DF PU RL DF SP PD DF F BLT DF SP RL Large L size Paper longer than the LTR length 216 mm in the feed direction Small S size Paper of the LTR length 216 mm or shorter in the feed direction Reading counters for consumable parts parts needing periodic replacement The copier has special counters DRBL 1 DRBL 2 that can be used to provide a guideline for when to...

Page 774: ...h large and small size sheets Returns to 00000000 after reaching 99999999 1 FAX PRT Fax received print counter Incremented along with the billing counter when a fax is received when a print is delivered outside the copier and two sided paper is loaded Blank sheets are not counted Incremented by 1 for both large and small size sheets Can be cleared Returns to 00000000 after reaching 99999999 1 BOX ...

Page 775: ...ette 4 paper feed total counter Displays number of sheets fed from cassette 4 bottom level of cassette pedestal Returns to 00000000 after reaching 99999999 1 MF Manual paper feed total counter Displays number of sheets fed from manual paper feed unit Returns to 00000000 after reaching 99999999 1 DK Deck paper feed total counter Displays number of sheets fed from deck paper feed unit Returns to 000...

Page 776: ...LL Number of sheets that have passed through secondary transfer outer roller count value is stored in controller 1 2TR INRL Number of sheets that have passed through secondary transfer internal roller count value is stored in controller 1 C1 SP RL Cassette 1 separation roller no of sheets fed 1 C1 FD RL Cassette 1 separation roller no of sheets fedCassette 1 separation roller no of sheets fed 1 C2...

Page 777: ...CB 1 LNT TAP5 for the dust collecting tape D indicates the number of sheets that have passed count retained by controller PCB 1 STAMP Stamp operation count 1 PF PU RL for the paper deck pickup roller indicates the number of sheets that have passed count retained by controller PCB 1 PD SP RL for the paper deck separation roller indicates the number of sets that have passed count retained by control...

Page 778: ...Chapter 20 UPGRADING ...

Page 779: ...ons 20 15 20 3 3 Formatting the Partitions 20 16 20 4 Downloading System Software 20 18 20 4 1 Batch Downloading 20 18 20 4 2 Downloading the System Software Single 20 23 20 5 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data 20 28 20 5 1 Outline 20 28 20 5 2 Uploading Procedure 20 29 20 5 3 Download Procedures 20 32 20 6 Version Upgrade using USB 20 34 20 6 1 Menu Function Overview 20 34 20 6 2 Points to Not...

Page 780: ...hen using USB memory In order to use these functions the main body must be set to download mode There are 2 types of download mode Safe mode download mode A Turn the main power ON by pressing 2 8 Normal mode download mode B Turn the main power ON by pressing 1 7 and select the following service mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD HDD Initialization HDD setting information HDD Flash ROM Back up RA...

Page 781: ...pter 20 20 2 F 20 2 Safe mode can be used in case the HDD is replaced in case the system does not start properly Press 2 8 Press 1 7 Boot ROM Boot Program HDD COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD SYSTEM Program ...

Page 782: ...n using USB memory Function Download Mode Normal Mode Download mode B Safe Mode Download mode A HDD Format Total BOOTDEV System Software Downloading 1 System Language RUI Boot Dcon Rcon SDICT MEAPCONT KEY TTS BROWSER TSTMP MEDIA HELP WebDAV G3FAX System Language RUI Boot Dcon Rcon SDICT MEAPCONT KEY TTS BROWSER TSTMP MEDIA HELP WebDAV Backup Data Uploading Downloading 2 SramRCON SramDCON Meapback ...

Page 783: ...0iF JPjaxxxx DE96 ICC PRG PRG iR2270iW iR2270iW ZZjaxxxx A825 PRG ZZjaxxxx A825 PRG iR2270iG JPjaxxxx EC30 ICC iR2270iG JPjaxxxx EC30 ICC PRG PRG Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete HDD System Software 2 4 5 1 3 OFF ON Boot ROM FLASH ROM HDD System Software System Software Do Download Mode w...

Page 784: ...ing of the DCON RCON DCON RCON can be downloaded both from normal safe mode but in the case of safe mode version information of the DCON RCON cannot be obtained and DCON RCON registered in the SST is always overwritten 20 2 Making Preparations 20 2 1 Registration of System Software System CD to SST Register the system software stored in the system CD onto SST Preparation Required Items PC installe...

Page 785: ... click Search F 20 5 MEMO XXXX on the screen indicates the system software version Same in the subsequent figures 6 The system software list in the system CD is displayed Remove the check of unnecessary folder or system software and then click Register F 20 6 ...

Page 786: ...er USB memory USB memory protected by security cannot be used Deactivate the security before use System Software Registration Procedure 1 Boot the PC 2 Connect the USB memory to the USB port of the PC 3 Boot the SST Required specification for USB memory Interface USB 1 1 or later Recommendation USB 2 0 Memory Memory 1GB or more recommended Total size of the system software package exceeds 512MB Fo...

Page 787: ...Chapter 20 20 8 4 Click the USB icon on the target selection screen F 20 8 5 Select the drive removable disc connected with the USB memory F 20 9 ...

Page 788: ... iRC4580 USenXXXX US MFP USB BOOT Y XXxxv0103 BROWSER Y XXxxv0100 DCON Y XXxxv0102 MEAPCONT Y XXxxv0105 SDICT N XXxxv0107 SYSTEM N JPenv0112 LANGUAGE Y XXenv0112 N XXjav0112 RUI Y XXenv0107 N XXjav0107 iR7105 d Valid drive DriveType 1 FileSystem FAT TotalSize 1 001MB FreeSpace 1 001MB CANCEL EXIT START Register Firmware Export Firmware Delete Firmware Delete Backup Data System Management Select th...

Page 789: ...ng for the PC IP address 172 16 1 160 Sub netmask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway Arbitrary Do not designate the following IP address on the PC 172 16 1 0 172 16 1 100 172 16 1 255 MFP USB Target Selection CONTROL Export Firm Selection iRC4580 USenXXXX US MFP USB BOOT Y XXxxv0103 BROWSER Y XXxxv0100 DCON Y XXxxv0102 MEAPCONT Y XXxxv0105 SDICT N XXxxv0107 SYSTEM N JPenv0112 LANGUAGE Y XXenv0112 N XXj...

Page 790: ...rn OFF the main power switch 4 Connect the machine body to the PC with the crossing cable F 20 13 5 Make the machine body be on the download mode for the function to be used In the case of the normal mode Press 1 7 to turn ON the main power switch After start up select the service mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD and push OK In the case of the safe mode When pressing 2 8 to turn ON the main po...

Page 791: ...re 1 2 Implement the shutdown sequence 1 3 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Connect the USB memory 2 to the USB port 1 F 20 14 3 If this machine is connected with the network cable detach it 4 Make the machine be on the download mode for the function to be used In the case of the normal mode Press 1 7 to turn OFF the main power switch After start up select the service mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM D...

Page 792: ...ne may not recognize the USB memory If the detection of the USB memory for maximum 60 seconds was tried after turning ON the main power switch but it failed the menu screen described above is not displayed Prepare another USB memory in such cases Simultaneous usage of the USB memory and SST is impossible Because the communication to SST is not performed when the machine detected the connection of ...

Page 793: ... partitions is registered on the partition setting information file On SST HDFormat on the folder iRCXXXX F 20 16 1 HDD for the service parts Partition not yet set 2 Format for all partitions Available only on the safe mode 3 HDD after formatting 4 Partition setting information file HDD 1 2 3 TMP_GEN TMP_PSS FSTDEV APL_SEND APL_MEAP IMG_MNG APL_GEN APL_KEEP APL_LOG FSTCDEV THUMDEV BOOTDEV PDLDEV T...

Page 794: ...mpossible 2 Format possible on the safe mode MEMO Formatting per partition is possible on the service mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM HD CLEAR For BOOTDEV formatting is impossible on the service mode HDD 1 TMP_GEN TMP_PSS FSTDEV APL_SEND APL_MEAP IMG_MNG APL_GEN APL_KEEP APL_LOG FSTCDEV THUMDEV BOOTDEV PDLDEV TMP_FAX 2 ...

Page 795: ...EGISTER REMOVE Click the interface and click the START button Service Support Tool DLM0 Ver 3 21E iRC4580 Single ALL ALL_HDF 1 2 SelectableFirmware SelectableFirmware Control 172 16 1 100 iRC4580 SAFE SYSTEM Firmware Version Active USen01 02n Hold USen01 02i RCON XXxx3003 DCON XXxx0101 MEAPCONT XXxx0102 BOOTROM XXxx0102C RUI XXja0101 XXen0101 LANGUAGE XXja0102 XXen0102 BOOT iRC4580 Select the firm...

Page 796: ...FE ServiceSupportTool DLM10 Ver 3 21E Clear Click the button of the task to be executed Download Firmware Upload Data Download Data Restore Backup System Format HDD Cansel Return to Main Menu Start HDDFormat ALL Safe Mode Select the partition then click Start button Normal Mode ALL BOOTDEV Control 172 16 1 100 iRC4580 SAFE ServiceSupportTool DLM10 Ver 3 21E Clear Click the button of the task to be...

Page 797: ...ading on the safe mode Implement bulk loading for the registered software other than the following software BOOT DCON RCON Use it when reinstalling the system software after HDD format It is possible to select executing downloading for the above three system software 20 4 1 2 Procedure for Downloading Here the procedure for bulk downloading on the safe mode is shown as an example 1 Start up SST 2 ...

Page 798: ...Skip Ver down Comfirm Confirm Overwrite Confirm firmware versions CANCEL EXIT Start Batch Download Register Firmware CONNECT Delete Firmware Delete Backup Data System Management Click a button to execute Click RESUME button to restart batch download Batch List Interface Network IP Address 172 16 1 100 Job 1 Wait 2 iRC4080_SYSTEM_JPja0112 Not register 3 iRC4080_LANGUAGE_XXen0112 4 iRC4080_LANGUAGE_...

Page 799: ... o r m a t Resume Finish Pause Batch Result Batch download results Processing batch download To pause or finish this process Click PAUSE or FINISH button in 5 seconds Results 1 3 iRC4580_LANGUAGE_XXen0112_XXenv0112 5 iRC4580_RUI_XXen0101_XXenv0107 OK 1 Batch List Job 1 Wait 2 iRC4080_SYSTEM_JPja0112 Not register 3 iRC4080_LANGUAGE_XXen0112 4 iRC4080_LANGUAGE_XXja0112 Not regi 5 iRC4080_RUI_XXen010...

Page 800: ...iRC4080_TTS_XXen0111 10 iRC4080_TTS_XXja0110 Not registered 11 iRYYYY_KEY_XXxc0101 12 iRYYYY_KEY_XXxp0101 13 Wait 14 Wait 15 Wait 16 iRC4080_BOOT_XXxx0103 17 iRC4080_DCON_XXxx0102 Click RESUME button to restart batch download Batch List Job Service Support Tool DLM0 Ver 3 21E Batch download list Same Ver Skip Ver down Comfirm Confirm Overwrite Confirm firmware versions BATCH CONTROL i R C 4 5 8 0 ...

Page 801: ...Result Batch download results Results Resume 1 3 iRC4580_LANGUAGE_XXen0102_XXenv0112 5 iRC4580_RUI_XXen0101_XXenv0107 OK 7 iRC4580_MEAPCONT_XXxx0102_XXxxv0105 9 iRC4580_TTS_XXenv0111 OK 11 iRYYYY_KEY_XXxcv0101 OK 12 iRYYYY_KEY_XXxpv0101 OK 13 HDD 14 OFF1 7 1 W 1 Wait ait 2 iRC4080_SYSTEM_JPja0112 Not register 3 iRC4080_LANGUAGE_XXen0112 4 iRC4080_LANGUAGE_XXja0112 Not regi 5 iRC4080_RUI_XXen0107 6...

Page 802: ...ng SYSTEM is explained as an example Same for other system software 1 Start up STT 2 Select the model to be connected 1 and the information file for single downloading 2 Single After checking the network setting click Start button F 20 30 3 After selecting version of System to be downloaded click Start button F 20 31 2 1 ...

Page 803: ...24 4 When downloading is completed click OK button Return to the previous page F 20 32 5 Restart the machine The procedure differs due to download mode In the case of the normal mode 5 1 Click Shutdown button F 20 33 ...

Page 804: ...oftware is written on HDD or flash ROM the status of the writing is displayed on the screen of the control panel The message urging the power OFF ON is displayed when the writing was completed then turn OFF ON the main power switch Prohibition of power OFF during downloading writing Do not turn OFF the power of the machine during downloading or writing It may obstruct the activation of the machine...

Page 805: ...lash ROM Before restarting the machine body when the download is completed implement the following procedure 1 Click Clear button 1 F 20 36 2 Click Execute clear button The system software stored on the temporary storage space of HDD is cleared F 20 37 3 Click OK button Return to the previous page F 20 38 1 ...

Page 806: ...Chapter 20 20 27 MEMO After connecting the following device information 1 is displayed on the right upper area of the SST screen IP address Product name Download mode F 20 39 1 ...

Page 807: ...y to the machine not to the other machines MEMO In case of replacing HDD or executing the format of ALL and APL_MEAP upload MeapBack and then download it after the format By doing so it will be possible to save the MEAP application temporary In case of replacing the Reader Controller PCB upload the SramRCON and then download it after the replacement By doing so the setup data like the service mode...

Page 808: ... Single and click Start button after checking the network settings F 20 40 3 Click Data upload button F 20 41 MFP USB Target Selection CONTROL Export Firm Selection iRC4580 MFP USB c Interface Network IP Address 172 16 1 100 iRC4580 Single ALL ALL_HDF 1 2 SelectableFirmware Control 172 16 1 100 iRC4580 SAFE HDD SYSTEM Active USenXXXXn Hold JPjaXXXXw RCON XXxxXXXX DCON XXxxXXXX MEAPCONT XXxxXXXX BO...

Page 809: ...er inputting memo if necessary F 20 43 6 Click OK button 172 16 1 100 RC4580 SAFE c SramImg bin backup of meap backup of meap Sublog txt MeapBack bin Control FileSave SelectableDate HDD 172 16 1 100 iRC4580 SAFE c SramImg bin backup of meap backup of meap Sublog txt MeapBack bin MeapBack bin Control FileSave SelectableDate HDD ...

Page 810: ... 20 20 31 SramRCON SramDCON and MeapBack can be downloaded only to the machine from which upload is performed F 20 44 iRC4580 Meapback SramRCON SramDCON SST HDD Meapback bin System SRAM EEPROM SRAM SramImg bin ...

Page 811: ...after checking the network settings F 20 45 3 Click Data download button F 20 46 MFP USB Target Selection CONTROL Export Firm Selection iRC4580 MFP USB c Interface Network IP Address 172 16 1 100 iRC4580 Single ALL ALL_HDF 1 2 SelectableFirmware Control 172 16 1 100 iRC4580 SAFE HDD SYSTEM Active USenXXXXn Hold JPjaXXXXw RCON XXxxXXXX DCON XXxxXXXX MEAPCONT XXxxXXXX BOOTROM XXxxXXXXC Copy RUI XXja...

Page 812: ... click Start button F 20 47 5 When the download is completed click OK button It returns to the previous screen 172 16 1 100 iRC4580 SAFE Control FileSave SelectableDate c backup of meap backup of meap 2005 04 16 17 14 33 F6310130 RC4580 MeapBack bin upd HDD ...

Page 813: ...en BOOTDEV exists Format of BOOTDEV partition 4 Format HDD ALL displayed when BOOTDEV does not exist Format the all partitions Other Functions 5 Backup This function is under the development inspection thus not in use 6 Restore former version displayed only when the System is saved as backup Enabling the backup System 7 Clear downloaded files Clear the system software right after the download befo...

Page 814: ... cannot be obtained thus the system software in the USB memory must be always overwritten to HDD KEY both in the normal mode and the safe mode TTS both in the normal mode and the safe mode BROWSER both in the normal mode and the safe mode DCON only in the safe mode RCON only in the safe mode For the normal system software download not after the HDD replacement or after format the following mode is...

Page 815: ...Procedure 1 If the power of the machine is ON turning off the main power after executing HDD shutdown processing 2 Connect the USB memory to the USB port 3 Get the machine into the download mode the normal mode or the safe mode 4 By following the display on the control panel press key 1 0 Execution of download Keys other than 0 Return to the menu screen F 20 50 5 The download status is displayed o...

Page 816: ...n case of the same version or old version the confirmation message is displayed on the screen and the availability of download execution can be selected Unlike in case of Menu 1 the automatic reboot after the download is not executed By turning OFF ON the power supply manually writing of the system software is executed on start up Procedure 1 If the power of the machine is ON turning off the main ...

Page 817: ...en download is completed the message prompting to press key is displayed so press any key In case of the normal mode the shutdown sequence is activated F 20 55 6 When the message prompting to turn OFF the power supply turn OFF the main power switch Then remove the USB memory and turning ON the main power switch 7 After the machine is started writing to the system area in HDD or the Flash ROM is st...

Page 818: ...he power of the machine is ON turning off the main power after executing HDD shutdown processing 2 Connect the USB memory to the USB port 3 Get the machine into the download mode the normal mode or the safe mode 4 By following the display on the control panel press key 3 0 Execution of download Keys other than 0 Return to the menu screen F 20 57 5 The download status is displayed on the control pa...

Page 819: ...available when the machine is in the safe mode 4 Format HDD displayed when BOOTDEV exists Format of BOOTDEV partition 4 Format HDD ALL displayed when replacing to a new HDD or BOOTDEV does not exist Format the all partitions Procedure Procedure to clear BOOTDEV partition is shown here 1 If the power of the machine is ON turning off the main power after executing HDD shutdown processing 2 Connect t...

Page 820: ... For the procedure see the Individual Download 20 6 7 Other Functions 5 Backup This function is under the development inspection thus normally do not use it 6 Restore former version displayed only when the system is saved as backup Enabling the system that is saved as backup and save the System that has been enabled as backup Procedure 1 If the power of the machine is ON turning OFF the main power...

Page 821: ...the system software stored in the temporary storage area in HDD This function can be used after the system software download Menu 2 and 3 and when clearing the file without writing in HDD Procedure 1 After the completion of the system software with Menu 2 and 3 execute the step 2 without turning OFF ON the power supply If turning OFF the power supply activate the machine in the safe mode 2 By foll...

Page 822: ...ence Procedure 1 By following the display on the control panel press key Stop 0 Execution Keys other than 0 Return to the menu screen The shutdown sequence is executed and the message prompting to turn OFF ON the power supply is displayed F 20 65 2 Turn OFF the main power switch and remove the USB memory ...

Page 823: ...Chapter 21 SERVICE TOOLS ...

Page 824: ...Contents Contents 21 1 Service Tools 21 1 21 1 1 Special Tools 21 1 21 1 2 Solvents and Oils 21 2 ...

Page 825: ...e machine T 21 1 No Tool name Tool No Ctgr Appearance Remarks 1 Digital multimeter FY9 2002 A Used for electrical checks for adjustment of laser power in com bination with the laser power checker 2 Cover switch TKN 0093 A 3 Tester extension pin FY9 3038 A 4 Tester extension pin L shaped FY9 3039 A Used as a probe ex tension when makingelectrical checks ...

Page 826: ...Chapter 21 21 2 5 Mirror positioning tool front rear FY9 3009 040 B Used for positioning mirror mounts 8 CA1 Test Sheet FY9 9030 A No Tool name Tool No Ctgr Appearance Remarks ...

Page 827: ...EK 3 Heat resisting grease Lubrication e g fixing drive areas Mineral oil family lithium soap Molybdenum disulfide MO 138S Tool No CK 0427 500 g can 4 Lubricating oil Mineral oil paraffin family Tool No CK 0524 100 cc 5 Lubricating oil Lubrication i e drive areas friction areas Silicone oil Tool No CK 0551 20 g 6 Lubricating oil EM 50L Lubrication e g gears Special oil Special solid lubricating ag...

Page 828: ...APPENDIX ...

Page 829: ...ner unit position HP shading position HP shading position Copyboard cover start position Image end Shift to copyboard scan start position CCD LIVE control 1 CCD KILL control 1 Forward Reverse shift shading fixed shading white plate dust detection control shading correction 1 controls by turning on off the power of the CCD and the circuitry around it for power saving and for protection against over...

Page 830: ...g motor Y M20 Toner stirring motor M M21 Toner stirring motor C M22 Toner stirring motor Bk M23 Development motor Y M12 Development motor M M13 Development motor C M14 Development motor Bk M15 Developing bias AC Y Developing bias AC M Developing bias AC C Development basis AC Bk Developing bias DC Y Developing bias DC M Developing bias DC C Developing basis DC Bk Charging roller AC Y Charging roll...

Page 831: ...ement control motor_phase_B AC_I_SNS_M charging_AC_current_M BELT SIDE MOTER B Fixing belt displacement control motor_phase_B AC_I_SNS_Y charging_AC_current_Y BELT SIDE UPPER SNS 1 Fixing belt position sensor signal 1 ACC C laser_scanner_motor_acceleration_control BELT SIDE UPPER SNS 2 Fixingbelt position sensor signal 2 ACC_CLK machine_communication_I F BELT SIDE UPPER SNS 3 Fixingbelt position s...

Page 832: ...gnal DEV_AC_CLK1_M developing_AC_bias_clock_error_1M DATA__C_A Image_signal_for_Beam_A DEV_AC_CLK1_Y developing_AC_bias_clock_error_1Y DATA__C_A Image_signal_for_Beam_A DEV_AC_CLK2_C developing_AC_bias_clock_error_2C DATA__C_B ImBge_signBl_for_BeBm_B DEV_AC_CLK2_K developing_AC_bias_clock_error_2Bk DATA__C_B ImBge_signBl_for_BeBm_B DEV_AC_CLK2_M developing_AC_bias_clock_error_2M DATA__C_C ImCge_si...

Page 833: ...ge_DC_bias_clock_error LED M B M video_signal FD DELI SNS face down_delivery_sensor LED M B Y video_signal FG C Signal_of_rotational_speed_of_scanner_motorÅiCÅj LED M B Y video_signal FG M Signal_of_rotational_speed_of_scanner_motorÅiMÅj LED ON C LDE_motor_ON OFF FG K Signal_of_rotational_speed_of_scanner_motorÅiKÅj LED ON K LDE_motor_ON OFF FG Y Signal_of_rotational_speed_of_scanner_motorÅiYÅj LE...

Page 834: ..._B REFEED_SNS re pickup_sensor PM_FEED1_A cassette_1_pickup_motor_phase_A REGI_MF_CLOSE_SNS registration_manual_feed_open closed_detection PM_FEED1_A cassette_1_pickup_motor_phase_A REGI_SNS registration_sensor_signal PM_FEED2_A cassette_2_pickup_motor_phase_A REGIMULTI_FAN_ERR registration_manual_feed_fan_rotation_detection PM_FEED2_A cassette_2_pickup_motor_phase_A REGIMULTI_FAN_ON registration_...

Page 835: ...n_detection_Bk TCRG_PULSE_M toner_container_rotation_detection_M TCRG_PULSE_Y toner_container_rotation_detection_Y TBF_LOOP_SNS_1 Fixing loop sensor signal TR1_CTRL_C primary_transfer_control_C TR1_CTRL_K primary_transfer_control_Bk TR1_CTRL_M primary_transfer_control_M TR1_CTRL_Y primary_transfer_control_Y TR1_OUT_C primary_transfer_bias_output_C TR1_OUT_K primary_transfer_bias_output_Bk TR1_OUT_...

Page 836: ...2T 1 2 3 4 5 J302 2 3 4 1 J301T 2 3 4 1 J301 2 1 J303_BUS 0 36 1 2 3 4 5 6 J209 1 2 3 J207 1 2 3 J207T 1 2 3 1 2 3 J208 1 2 3 1 2 3 J208T 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J201 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J201T 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 J309 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 J309T 1 J505A_BUS 0 7 1 J307_BUS 0 50 9 J303 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J310T 1 44 43 45 J307 J203 46 48 50 1 2 3 J8 1 2 3 J7 1 2 3 J6 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J310 1 2 3 J313 50 49 48 47 46 35 ...

Page 837: ...27 3 2 1 MAKER 1 2 3 J4002L 1 2 3 J4001L 3 2 1 MAKER 1 2 J12 6 5 3 4 1 2 MAKER 1 2 3 4 J693 04CZ 6Y 1 2 J1631D 8 292112 2 2 3 4 5 1 J604 DF7E 5P 2 3 1 J624 XA 3P 2 3 4 1 J42 DF7E 4 2 1 8 292115 2 J630 1 2 XAP 02P 1 J7 2 3 4 5 1 J5 DF7E 5 12 11 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J565 1 2 3 4 J1006 04CZ 6Y 1 2 3 J1035 03XR 6Y 1 2 3 J1036 03CZ 6Y 2 3 1 J681 DF7E 3P 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J617 10CZ 6Y 1 5 4 3 2 DF7E ...

Page 838: ...26 B30 A30 A25 B25 A12 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A10 A9 A8 B1 A1 B2 A2 B3 A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 A6 A7 A11 A20 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 A21 A22 A23 A24 J101 B43 B42 B41 A43 A42 A41 A44 B44 B50 A50 A47 A48 A49 B47 B48 B49 B45 A45 A46 B46 B36 A36 A35 B35 B39 B38 B37 A39 A38 A37 A40 B40 B34 A34 A31 A32 A33 B31 B32 B33 B29 B28 B27 B26 A29 A28 A27 A26 A30 B30 B2...

Page 839: ...64D J112B_BUS 0 14 J112A_BUS 0 14 J112WH CZW 28P J112B 14CZ 6H J112A 14CZ 6Y J660F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J654L SMI2_8 J661F 1 2 J661FB SMI2_2 2 1 SMI2_2 J660FB 3 2 1 SMI2_3 J660FA 1 2 3 J661FA SMI2_3 J654LH SMI2_8H 2 1 SMI2_2 J662FB J660M TS4 J663F J662F 2 1 SMI2_2 J663MB J663M 1 2 3 J663FA SMI2_3 1 2 J663FB SMI2_2 1 2 J662MB SMI2_2 J662M J661M 2 1 SMI2_2 J661MB 1 2 3 J660MA SMI2_3 1 2 J660MB SMI2_2 3 2...

Page 840: ... 7 8 9 10 11 4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 CZH 14 J852LH J850LH CZH 14 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J850L 14CZ 6Y 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 14CZ 6H J852L 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J850D 14CZ 6Y 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 14CZ 6H J852D J857H CZH 2P 1 2 J857 02XR 6Y P 1 2 J863L 02XR 6YP CZH 2P J863H 2 1 02XR 6Y P J863 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 J864 03XR 6Y P 1 2 3 J862 03XR 6Y P 3 2 1 03XR 6...

Page 841: ... 0 8 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J716 13CZ 6Y 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 12CZ 6Y J7161L 1 2 3 XR3 J2002 1 2 3 J2003 XR3 1 2 3 XR3 J2004 1 2 3 J2005 XR3 1 2 3 J1008D 03XR 6Y P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J7201L 08CZ 6Y 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 J7231 XR3 1 2 J7241 XR2 1 2 3 CT 3P J1008L 3 2 1 1 2 XR 2 J7202L 3 2 1 1 2 3 J1028 03XR 6Y P J1028DH CTH 3P 1 2 3 J1028L CT 3P 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 07CZ 6Y J7072...

Page 842: ... 1 2 3 4 XR4 J653 1 2 3 4 J652 XR4 1 2 3 4 J651 XR4 1 2 3 4 XR4 J650 CZ 8P J7000LA CZ 8P J7000LB J7000LWH CTWH 16P 3 2 1 CT 3P J7183L J710B CZ 8P 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 6 2 1 1 2 J304L CT 2P J304DH 2 1 CT 2P J303L 2 1 CT 2P J301L 1 2 J302L CT 2P 1 2 CT 2 J312 2 1 J311 CT 2 1 2 CT 2 J310 2 1 J3091 CT 2 2 1 XR 2P J304D 2 1 J302...

Page 843: ... K DEC K N C K 4 N C K 5 LED M A C LED M B C LED ON C LED M A C START C FG C 24V M DEC M LED M A M LED M A M LED ON M LED M B M LED M B M START M LED ON Y 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 N C K 5 N C K 4 N C K 3 N C K 1 LED M A C LED ON M LED M A M LED M A M LED M B M LED M B M LED M A Y LED M A Y START K ACC C DEC C GND C FG C 24V M ACC M DEC M GND M FG M START M 24V Y ACC Y DEC Y FG Y GND Y 12 11 10 9 8 2 ...

Page 844: ...B_SUB 0 15 J41LH BU30P TZW J41DWH CZWH 30P J41LWH CZWH 30P J41DA 15CZ 6Y J41DB 15CZ 6H J41LB 15CZ 6H J41LA 15CZ 6Y 1 2 3 4 J7004D 04XR 6Y P J431L 08CZ 6Y 08CZ 6Y J431D 1 17 2 20 1 J3DA CZ20P 6Y J42LH BU16 TZW S J42LWH CZWH 16P 08CZ 6Y J42LA J42LB 08CZ 6H 1 J431LH BU08TZ S 2 1 J38M DF7E 2P 4 1 2 3 J4D 40R RPZV K2GG J411DB_SUB 0 8 20 1 J3DB CZ20P 6H J31LA CZ20P 6Y J721B_SUB 0 11 J721A_SUB 0 11 1 2 3...

Page 845: ... 3 J1120L 1 2 3 J1013 25P_RWZV J406L J406LB CZ12B J406LA CZ13A CT6 1 2 3 2 3 1 J33 MINI_YUNI 3 1 2 XR 2P J29 J406LA_BUS 0 13 25R_RWZV J406D 1 2 3 J407D XR3 6 5 J405LH 13 1 J406DA CZ13A J406DB CZ12B 13 J403DB 13CZ 6H J403DWH CZWH 26 S 12 J403DA 13CZ 6Y J403LWH CZWH26 J403LH CZH26 J403LA CZ13A J403LB CZ13B 2 1 J412D XR_2 CTH2 J412DH J411DH CTH2 1 2 XR_2 J411D XR3 J12LH 1 2 3 J12L 03XR 6Y P 3 2 1 XR3...

Page 846: ...USE_DRIVER_ 5V FUSE_DRIVER_ON FUSE_DRIVER_GND FUSE_DEIVER_BREAK J755M 31P_RWZV J755MB_BUS 0 15 J755MA CZ16A 2 1 J251M J120A CZ 16P CZWH 32 J120WH J120A_BUS 0 16 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 3 2 1 4 4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 3 2 1 4 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 3 2 1 4 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 3 2 1 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 1 2 3 8 9 10 11 12 ...

Page 847: ...EW MOLEX 2 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J87 CZ12 J195DH 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 CZ10 J195D 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 CZ10 J95 10 CZWH 20 S J114WH 10CZ 6H J114B J911DA_BUS 0 12 CZ 12 J911LB 20 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 CZ10 J73CK J74LA_BUS 0 16 J74DB_BUS 0 16 PCB24 J912LH CZH 10 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J195L CZ10 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 CZ 10 J912D 1 5 4 3 2 J84YM NEW MOLEX 5 1 3 2 NEW MOLEX 3 J71M 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10...

Page 848: ...3 2 1 03CZ 6Y J2120D 1 2 XA 2 J2202F 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J2111D 10XR 6Y P 1 2 J2122L XR 2 1 2 J2121D XR 2 J2131DH CTH 3 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J1033 09XR 6Y P 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 1 4 3 2 171822 4 J2137F J2205CLH 1 175694 2 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J2205CL 12XR 6Y P J2108CLH 1 175694 2 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J2108 12XR 6Y P 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 08XR 6Y P J2125D 2 1 02XR 6Y P J2213D 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 ...

Page 849: ... 2 3 1 J2010 2 3 1 J2009 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J2220L 2 3 1 J2222L 1 2 3 J2004 1 2 3 J23A_BUS 0 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J2220D MT228 MT229 MT227 MT2130 MT230 2 3 1 J267D J267DH J3334H 1 2 3 J3334 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 J265 3 2 1 J2013 J3000DB_BUS 0 12 4 1 2 3 J23LA 3 4 5 6 1 2 J2221L MT224 MT225 1 3 2 J267L 2 1 J2220DH MT231 2 1 SOLD210 SOLD2 SOLD1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 MT210 20 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13...

Page 850: ... 2 3 1 J2010 2 3 1 J2009 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J2220L 2 3 1 J2222L 1 2 3 J2004 1 2 3 J23A_BUS 0 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J2220D MT228 MT229 MT227 MT2130 MT230 2 3 1 J267D J267DH J3334H 1 2 3 J3334 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 J265 3 2 1 J2013 J3000DB_BUS 0 12 4 1 2 3 J23LA 3 4 5 6 1 2 J2221L MT224 MT225 1 3 2 J267L 2 1 J2220DH MT231 2 1 SOLD210 SOLD2 SOLD1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 MT210 20 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13...

Page 851: ......

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for Color imageRUNNER C4580

Brand: Magicard Pages: 26

Brand: QMS Pages: 194

Brand: Olympus Pages: 2

Brand: Sagem Pages: 86

Brand: Durst Pages: 2

Brand: Oki Pages: 126

VersaLink C400V

Brand: Xerox Pages: 196

PR-INT-MX-RAVAS-ABLE

Brand: Ravas Pages: 26

Brand: Axiohm Pages: 8

Brand: Radio Shack Pages: 42

Brand: Ricoh Pages: 44

Brand: Oki Pages: 204

Brand: Citizen Pages: 32

Brand: Wasp Pages: 46

Brand: Printronix Pages: 148

Brand: Xante Pages: 106

imagePROGRAF TM-355

Brand: Canon Pages: 52

Brand: SATO Pages: 36

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands